Volvo S60 Owners Manual 2009 PDF
Summary of Content for Volvo S60 Owners Manual 2009 PDF
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:13:54+01:00; Page 1
evastarck
VOLVO S60
Owners Manual
DEAR VOLVO OWNER THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your
Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of
you and your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the
world. Your Volvo has also been designed to satisfy all current
safety and environmental requirements.
In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend
that you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions
and maintenance information contained in this owner's manual.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 1
evastarck
Table of contents
2 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
00 00 Introduction
Important information................................. 8
Volvo and the environment....................... 11
01 01 Safety
Seatbelts................................................... 16
Airbag system........................................... 18
Airbags (SRS)............................................ 19
Activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS)*. 22
Side airbags (SIPS bags).......................... 24
Inflatable Curtain (IC)................................ 26
WHIPS....................................................... 27
When the systems deploy......................... 29
Child safety............................................... 30 02 02 Instruments and controls
Overview, left-hand drive car.................... 38
Overview, right-hand drive car.................. 40
Combined instrument panel...................... 42
Indicator and warning symbols................. 44
Information display................................... 47
Switches in the centre console................. 48
Lighting panel........................................... 51
Left-hand stalk switch............................... 53
Trip computer*.......................................... 54
Right-hand stalk switch............................ 56
Cruise control*.......................................... 58
Steering wheel adjustment, parking brake......................................................... 60
Electrical socket, cigarette lighter............. 61
Power windows......................................... 62
Rearview and door mirrors....................... 64
Power sunroof*......................................... 69
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 2
evastarck
Table of contents
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3
03 03 Climate control
General information on climate control..... 74
Manual climate control, AC....................... 76
Electronic climate control, ECC*............... 78
Air distribution........................................... 81
Fuel-driven parking heater*....................... 82
04 04 Interior
Front seats................................................ 88
Interior lighting.......................................... 90
Storage spaces in the passenger com- partment.................................................... 92
Rear seat................................................... 96
Cargo area................................................ 97
05 05 Locks and alarm
Keys and remote controls....................... 102
Locking and unlocking............................ 104
Child safety locks.................................... 107
Alarm*...................................................... 108
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 3
evastarck
Table of contents
4 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 06 Starting and driving
General.................................................... 114
Refuelling................................................ 116
Starting the car....................................... 118
Manual gearbox...................................... 120
Automatic gearbox.................................. 121
All-wheel drive AWD*........................... 124
Brake system.......................................... 125
Stability and traction control system*..... 127
Active chassis FOUR-C*...................... 129
Parking assistance*................................. 130
Towing and recovery.............................. 132
Start assistance...................................... 134
Driving with a trailer................................ 135
Towing equipment*................................. 137
Detachable towbar*................................ 139
Load on the roof..................................... 143
Adjusting headlamp pattern.................... 145
BLIS (Blind Spot Information System)*... 152
07 07 Wheels and tyres
General.................................................... 158
Tyre pressure.......................................... 161
Warning triangle* and spare wheel......... 163
Tyre pressure monitoring*....................... 165
Changing wheels.................................... 167
Emergency puncture repair*................... 169
08 08 Car care
Cleaning.................................................. 176
Touching up paintwork........................... 179
Rustproofing........................................... 180
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 4
evastarck
Table of contents
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5
09 09 Maintenance and service
Volvo service........................................... 184
Self-maintenance.................................... 185
Bonnet and engine compartment........... 186
Diesel...................................................... 188
Oils and fluids......................................... 189
Wiper blades........................................... 193
Battery..................................................... 194
Replacing bulbs...................................... 196
Fuses....................................................... 203 10 10 Infotainment system
Overview HU-450.................................... 214
Overview HU-650.................................... 215
Overview HU-850.................................... 216
Audio functions HU-450/650/850........... 217
Audio functions HU-450......................... 219
Audio functions HU-650/850.................. 220
Radio functions HU-450/650/850........... 222
Radio functions HU-450......................... 224
Radio functions HU-650/850.................. 225
Radio functions HU-450/650/850........... 226
Cassette player HU-450......................... 231
CD player HU-650................................... 233
Internal CD changer HU-850.................. 234
External CD changer HU-450/650/850*.. 235
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II HU-850...... 236
Technical data......................................... 238
Phone functions*..................................... 239
Call options............................................. 242
Memory functions................................... 245
Menu functions....................................... 247
Miscellaneous information...................... 252
11 11 Specifications
Type designation..................................... 256
Dimensions and weights......................... 258
Engine specifications.............................. 260
Engine oil................................................ 262
Fluids and lubricants............................... 264
Fuel......................................................... 266
Catalytic converter.................................. 269
Electrical system..................................... 270
Type approval......................................... 272
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 5
evastarck
Table of contents
6
12 12 Alphabetical Index
Alphabetical Index.................................. 273
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 6
evastarck
Table of contents
7
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 7
evastarck
Introduction
Important information
8
Reading the Owner's Manual
Introduction A good way of getting to know your new car is
to read the owner's manual, ideally before your
first journey. This will give you the opportunity
to familiarise yourself with new functions, to
see how best to handle the car in different sit-
uations, and to make the best use of all the
car's features. Please pay attention to the
safety instructions contained in the manual.
The equipment described in the owner's man-
ual is not present in all cars . In addition to
standard equipment, this manual also
describes options (factory fitted equipment)
and certain accessories (retrofitted extra
equipment). If you are uncertain over what is
standard or option/accessory then contact
your Volvo dealer.
Volvo cars are adapted for the varying require-
ments of different markets, as well as for
national or local legal requirements and regu-
lations.
The specifications, design features and illus-
trations in this owner's manual are not binding.
We reserve the right to make modifications
without prior notice.
Volvo Car Corporation
Option All types of option/accessory are marked with
an asterisk .
The range of options/accessories for the dif-
ferent car models varies depending on the mar-
ket. The majority of options are factory fitted
and cannot be retrofitted, accessories are ret-
rofitted.
Contact your authorised Volvo dealer for more
information.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts advise of a risk of personal injury.
IMPORTANT
Important texts advise of a risk of material damage.
NOTE
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of features and functions for exam- ple.
Footnote There is footnote information in the owner's
manual that is located at the bottom of the
page. This information is an addition to the text
that it refers to via a number. If the footnote
refers to text in a table then letters are used
instead of numbers for referral.
Message texts There are displays in the car that show text
messages. These text messages are high-
lighted in the owner's manual by means of the
text being slightly larger and printed in grey.
Examples of this are in menu texts and mes-
sage texts on the information display (e.g.
Audio settings).
Decals The car contains different types of decal which
are designed to convey important information
in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the
car have the following descending degree of
importance for the warning/information.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 8
evastarck
Introduction
Important information
9
Warning for personal injury
G031590
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,
white text/image on black message field. Dan-
gerous situation which, if not avoided, may
result in serious personal injury or fatality.
Risk of property damage
G 03
15 92
White ISO symbols on black symbol field, white
text/image on black message field. If a colour
is required then the decal shall be blue. Dan-
gerous situation which, if not avoided, may
result in minor or moderate damage to prop-
erty.
Information
G 03
15 93
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black message field.
Procedure lists Procedures where action must be taken in a
certain sequence are numbered in the owner's
manual.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 9
evastarck
Introduction
Important information
10
When there is a series of illustrations for
step-by-step instructions each step is
numbered in the same way as the corres-
ponding illustration.
There are numbered lists with letters adja-
cent to the series of illustrations where the
order of the instructions is not significant.
Arrows appear numbered and unnum-
bered and are used to illustrate a move-
ment.
If there is no series of illustrations for step-by-
step instructions then the different steps are
numbered with normal numbers.
Position lists Red circles containing a number are used
in overview images where different com-
ponents are pointed out. The number
recurs in the position list featured in con-
nection with the illustration that describes
the item.
Bulleted lists A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
points in the owner's manual.
Example:
Coolant
Engine oil
To be continued This symbol is located furthest down to the
right when a section continues on the next
double-page spread.
Recording data
One or more of the computers in your Volvo are
capable of recording detailed information. This
information is intended for use in research to
enhance safety and for diagnosing faults in
some of the in-car systems. The data may
include details regarding seatbelt use by the
driver and passengers, the functions of various
vehicle systems and modules, and status infor-
mation about the engine, throttle, steering,
brakes and other systems. This data can also
include details of the way the car is driven. This
type of information can include, without being
limited to, specific details such as vehicle
speed, the use of the brake and accelerator
pedals and steering wheel position. This latter
type of data can be stored for a limited period
while the car is being driven and subsequently
during a collision or a near-collision. Volvo Car
Corporation will not disclose the stored infor-
mation without consent. However, Volvo Car
Corporation may be forced to disclose the
information due to national legislation. Volvo
Car Corporation and its authorised workshops
may also read and use the information.
Accessories and extra equipment
The incorrect connection and installation of
accessories can negatively affect the car's
electrical system. Certain accessories only
function when their associated software is
installed in the car's computer system. Always
contact an authorised Volvo workshop before
installing accessories which are connected to
or affect the electrical system.
Information on the Internet
At www.volvocars.com there is further infor-
mation concerning your car.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 10
evastarck
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 11
Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy
G 00
00 00
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo-
ration's core values which influence all opera-
tions. We also believe that our customers share
our consideration for the environment.
Your Volvo complies with strict international
environmental standards and is also manufac-
tured in one of the cleanest and most resource-
efficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corpo-
ration has global ISO certification, which
includes the environmental standard ISO
14001 covering all factories and several of our
other units. We also set requirements for our
partners so that they work systematically with
environmental issues.
EPI (Environmental Product Information) is
supplied for all Volvo models. Here you can see
how the environment is affected during the
entire lifecycle of the car.
Read more at www.volvocars.com/EPI.
Fuel consumption Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption
in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel
consumption generally results in lower emis-
sion of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
It is possible for the driver to influence fuel con-
sumption. For more information read under the
heading, Reducing environmental impact.
Efficient emission control Your Volvo is manufactured following the con-
cept "Clean inside and out" a concept that
encompasses a clean interior environment as
well as highly efficient emission control. In
many cases the exhaust emissions are well
below the applicable standards.
Clean air in the passenger compartment A passenger compartment filter prevents dust
and pollen from entering the passenger com-
partment via the air intake.
A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (Inte-
rior Air Quality System) ensures that the incom-
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 11
evastarck
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
12
ing air is cleaner than the air in the traffic
outside.
The system consists of an electronic sensor
and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni-
tored continuously and if there is an increase
in the level of certain unhealthy gases such as
carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed.
Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic,
queues and tunnels for example.
The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozone
and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon
filter.
Textile standard The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea-
sant and comfortable, even for people with
contact allergies and for asthma sufferers.
Extreme attention has been given to choosing
environmentally-compatible materials. This
means that they also fulfil the requirements in
the Oeko-Tex 100 standard 1, a major advance
towards a healthier passenger compartment
environment.
Oeko-Tex certification covers seatbelts, car-
pets and fabrics for example. The leather in the
upholstery undergoes chromium-free tanning
with plant substances and fulfils the certifica-
tion requirements.
Volvo workshops and the environment Regular maintenance creates the conditions
for a long service life and low fuel consumption
for your car. In this way you contribute to a
cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops
are entrusted with the service and mainte-
nance of your car it becomes part of our sys-
tem. We make clear demands regarding the
way in which our workshops are designed in
order to prevent spills and discharges into the
environment. Our workshop staff have the
knowledge and the tools required to guarantee
good environmental care.
Reducing environmental impact You can easily help reduce environmental
impact, for example, by driving economically
and by servicing and maintaining the car
according to the instructions in the owner's
manual.
The following additional advice will help you to
do your bit for the environment:
Decrease fuel consumption by choosing ECO tyre pressure, see page 161.
A roof load and ski box increase air resis- tance, leading to higher fuel consumption. Remove them directly after use.
Remove unnecessary items from the car. The greater the load the higher the fuel consumption.
If the car is equipped with an engine block heater, always use it before starting from cold. This reduces fuel consumption and exhaust emissions.
Drive gently and avoid braking too hard.
Drive in the highest gear possible. Low engine speeds result in lower fuel con- sumption.
Use engine braking to slow down.
Avoid letting the engine idle. Pay attention to local regulations. Switch off the engine when stationary for longer periods.
Always dispose of environmentally hazar- dous waste, such as batteries and oils, in an environmentally safe manner. If uncer- tain about disposal, consult an authorised Volvo workshop for advice.
Service your car regularly.
High speed increases consumption con- siderably due to increased wind resis- tance. A doubling of speed increases wind resistance 4 times.
These hints will help reduce fuel consumption
without increasing travel time or lessening the
enjoyment of driving. Apart from being kind to
1 More information on www.oekotex.com
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 12
evastarck
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
13
your car, you'll be saving money - and the
Earth's resources.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 13
evastarck
G 02
08 71
14 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Seatbelts................................................................................................. 16
Airbag system......................................................................................... 18
Airbags (SRS).......................................................................................... 19
Activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS)*............................................... 22
Side airbags (SIPS bags)........................................................................ 24
Inflatable Curtain (IC)............................................................................... 26
WHIPS..................................................................................................... 27
When the systems deploy....................................................................... 29
Child safety............................................................................................. 30
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 14
evastarck
01 SAFETY
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 15
evastarck
01 Safety
Seatbelts01
16
Always use a seatbelt
G 02
01 04
Tensioning the hip strap. The belt must be posi- tioned low down.
Heavy braking can have serious consequences
if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all
passengers use their seatbelts. It is important
that the seatbelt lies against the body so it can
provide maximum protection. Do not lean the
backrest too far back. The seatbelt is designed
to protect in a normal seating position.
Putting on a seatbelt Pull the seatbelt out slowly and secure it by
pressing the buckle into the lock. A loud
"click" indicates that the seatbelt has
locked.
Releasing the seatbelt Press the red lock button and then let the
seatbelt retract. If the seatbelt does not
retract fully, feed the seatbelt in by hand so
that it does not hang loose.
The seatbelt locks and cannot be
withdrawn
if it is pulled out too quickly.
during braking and acceleration.
if the car leans heavily.
Keep in mind the following:
do not use clips or anything else that can prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly
ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or caught on anything
the hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the abdomen).
tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal shoulder belt as illustrated.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one per- son.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts your- self. Contact an authorised Volvo work- shop. If a seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the protective characte- ristics of the seatbelt may have been lost, even if it appears to be undamaged. In addi- tion, replace the seatbelt if the belt is worn or damaged. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and intended for installation in the same position as the replaced seat- belt.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 16
evastarck
01 Safety
Seatbelts 01
17
Seatbelts and pregnancy
G 02
01 05
The seatbelt should always be worn during
pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the
correct way. The diagonal section should wrap
over the shoulder then be routed between the
breasts and to the side of the abdomen. The
lap section should lay flat over the thighs and
as low as possible under the abdomen. It
must never be allowed to ride upward. Remove
all slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits
close to the body. In addition, check that there
are no twists in the seatbelt.
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
should adjust their seats and steering wheel
such that they can easily maintain control of the
vehicle as they drive (which means that they
must be able to easily operate the foot pedals
and steering wheel). They should strive to posi-
tion the seat with as large a distance as possi-
ble between their abdomen and the steering
wheel.
Seatbelt reminder
G 02
70 49
An audio signal and indicator lamp remind a
driver not wearing a seatbelt to use one. The
audio reminder is speed dependent (at low
speeds), and time dependent (when the car is
started). The visual reminder is located in the
roof console and the combined instrument
panel.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 17
evastarck
01 Safety
Airbag system01
18
Seatbelt tensioner
All the seatbelts (except the centre rear seat-
belt) are equipped with seatbelt tensioners. A
mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner tightens
the seatbelt in the event of a sufficiently violent
collision. The seatbelt then provides more
effective restraint for the occupants.
Warning symbol on the combined instrument panel
G 02
72 84
The airbag system 1 is continually monitored by
the system's control module. The warning
symbol in the combined instrument panel illu-
minates when the ignition key is turned to posi-
tion I, II or III. The symbol goes out after
approx. 6 seconds provided the Airbag sys-
tem1 is fault-free.
As well as the warning symbol, a
message may appear on the dis-
play in appropriate cases. If the
warning symbol malfunctions, the
warning triangle illuminates and
the message SRS AIRBAG
SERVICE URGENT appears in
the display. Contact an authorised
Volvo workshop immediately.
WARNING
If the warning symbol for the airbag system remains illuminated or illuminates while driv- ing, it means that the airbag system does not have full functionality. The symbol can indicate a fault in the seatbelt tensioner sys- tem, SIPS, the SRS system or the IC sys- tem. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.
1 Includes SRS and seatbelt tensioner, SIPS and IC.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 18
evastarck
01 Safety
Airbags (SRS) 01
19
Airbag (SRS) on the driver's side
G 02
01 08
The car has an SRS airbag (Supplemental
Restraint System) in the steering wheel to sup-
plement the protection afforded by the seat-
belt. This airbag is fitted into the centre of the
steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked
SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.
Passenger airbag (SRS)
G 02
01 09
The car has an airbag to supplement the pro-
tection afforded by the seatbelt on the passen-
ger side 1. This airbag is folded up into a
compartment above the glovebox. The cover
panel is marked SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs against the backrest. Seatbelts must be secured.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated. 2
Never allow a child to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat. No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front pas- senger seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger the life of the child.
SRS system
G 02
01 11
SRS system, left-hand drive.
1 Not all cars have a passenger airbag (SRS). This can be unselected when the car is ordered. 2 For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 22.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 19
evastarck
01 Safety
Airbags (SRS)01
20
The SRS system consists of airbags and sen-
sors. A sufficiently violent collision trips the
sensors and the airbag(s) are inflated with hot
gas. To cushion the impact, the airbag deflates
when compressed. When this occurs, smoke
escapes into the car. This is completely nor-
mal. The entire process, including inflation and
deflation of the airbag, takes place within
tenths of a second.
WARNING
Repairs must only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.
Work on the SRS system can cause mal- function and result in serious personal injury.
G 02
01 10
SRS system, right-hand drive
NOTE
The sensors react differently depending on the course of the collision and whether or not the seatbelts on the driver and passen- ger side are used. It is therefore possible that only one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The SRS system senses the force of the collision on the car and adapts accordingly so that one or more air- bags is deployed. The capacities of the air- bags are also adapted to the collision force to which they are subjected.
NOTE
The airbags have a function whereby their capacities are adapted to the collision force to which the car is subjected.
G 02
73 31
Location of the passenger airbag in left-hand drive and right-hand drive cars
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 20
evastarck
01 Safety
Airbags (SRS) 01
21
G 03
22 43
Location of decal for front passenger airbag, left- hand drive car.
WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the instrument panel where the passenger air- bag is located.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 21
evastarck
01 Safety
Activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS)*01
22 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Key switch off - PACOS
General information The airbag (SRS) for the front passenger seat
can be deactivated if the car is equipped with
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). For
information on how to activate/deactivate, see
under the heading Activating/deactivating.
Key switch off/switch The switch for the passenger airbag is located
on the passenger end of the instrument panel
and is accessible when the passenger door is
open (see under the following heading, Acti-
vating/deactivating)
Check that the switch is in the required posi-
tion. Volvo recommends that the key blade is
used to change position.
WARNING
Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.
WARNING
If the car is equipped with a front passenger airbag (SRS), but does not have PACOS, the airbag will always be activated.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated. Failure to follow this advice could endanger the life of the child.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas- senger seat if the text message in the rear- view mirror indicates that the airbag (SRS) is deactivated and if the warning symbol for the airbag system is also displayed on the combined instrument panel. This indicates that there has been a severe malfunction. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.
Activating/deactivating
G 01
96 78
Switch location.
The airbag is activated. With the switch in
this position, persons taller than 140 cm
can sit in the front passenger seat, but
never children in a child seat or on a
booster cushion.
The airbag is deactivated. With the switch
in this position, children in a child seat or
on a booster cushion can sit in the front
passenger seat, but never persons taller
than 140 cm.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 22
evastarck
01 Safety
Activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS)* 01
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 23
WARNING
Activated airbag (passenger seat):
Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion on the front passenger seat when the airbag is activated. This also
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):
No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat when the airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.
Message
G 02
70 50
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag (SRS) is deactivated.
A text message in the rearview mirror indicates
that the airbag (SRS) for the front passenger
seat is deactivated (see preceding illustration).
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 23
evastarck
applies to anyone shorter than 140 cm.
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags)01
24
Side airbags SIPS bags
G 02
01 18
Side airbag locations.
In a side impact collision a large proportion of
the collision force is transferred by the SIPS
(Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pil-
lars, the floor, the roof and other structural
parts of the body. The side airbags at the driv-
er's and front passenger seats protect the
chest area and are an important part of the
system. The side airbags are located in the
front seat backrests.
WARNING
Side airbags are a supplement the seat- belts. Always use a seatbelt.
WARNING
Repairs must only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.
Work on the SIPS bag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.
WARNING
Do not put objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel, since this area is required by the side airbag.
WARNING
Use only Volvo genuine car seat covers, or seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags.
Child seats and side airbags The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the side airbag.
A child seat or booster cushion can be placed
on the front passenger seat provided that the
car does not have an activated 1 passenger
airbag.
SIPS bags
G 02
53 15
Driver's seat, left-hand drive
The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags
and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips
the sensors and the side airbags are inflated.
1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 22.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 24
evastarck
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01
25
G 02
53 16
Front passenger seat, left-hand drive
The airbag inflates between the occupant and
the door panel and thereby cushions the initial
impact. The airbag deflates when compressed
by the collision. The side airbag is normally only
deployed on the side of the collision.
G 03
22 46
Location of decal for side passenger airbag, driv- er's side, front, left-hand drive car.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 25
evastarck
01 Safety
Inflatable Curtain (IC)01
26
Properties
G 02
72 18
The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is a
supplement to the SIPS and the airbags. It is
fitted in the headlining along both sides of the
roof and protects all of the vehicle's outer
seats. A sufficiently violent collision trips the
sensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated.
The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the
driver and passengers from striking their heads
on the inside of the car during a collision.
WARNING
Never hang or fasten anything on the roof handles. The hook is only designed for light clothing (not for solid objects such as umbrellas for example).
Do not screw or install anything onto the car's headlining, door pillars or side panels. This could compromise the intended pro- tection. Only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are approved for placement in these areas.
WARNING
Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under the top edge of the side windows. Other- wise, the intended protection of the inflat- able curtain, which is concealed in the headlining, may be compromised.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 26
evastarck
01 Safety
WHIPS 01
27
Protection against whiplash injury WHIPS
G 02
03 47
The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) con-
sists of energy absorbing backrests and spe-
cially designed head restraints in the front
seats. The system is actuated by a rear-end
collision, where the angle and speed of the col-
lision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle all
have an influence.
WARNING
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Properties of the seat When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front
seat backrests are lowered backward to alter
the seating position of the driver and front seat
passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash
injury.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS system yourself. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WHIPS system and child seats/booster
cushions The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the WHIPS system.
Correct seating position For the best possible protection, the driver and
front seat passenger should sit in the centre of
the seat with as little space as possible
between the head and the head restraint.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 27
evastarck
01 Safety
WHIPS01
28
Do not obstruct the WHIPS system
G 02
01 25
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the rear seat cushion and the front seat back- rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the function of the WHIPS system.
G 02
01 26
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the corresponding front seat must be moved forward so that it does not touch the folded backrest.
WARNING
If a seat has been subjected to extreme forces, such as due to a rear-end collision, the WHIPS system must be checked by an authorised Volvo workshop.
Part of the WHIPS system's protective capacity may have been lost even if the seat appears to be undamaged.
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop to have the system checked even after a minor rear-end collision.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 28
evastarck
01 Safety
When the systems deploy 01
29
System Triggered
Seatbelt tensioner In a frontal collision
Airbags SRS In a frontal collision A
Side airbags SIPS In a side-impact accidentA
Inflatable Curtain IC In a side-impact accidentA
Whiplash protection WHIPS In a rear-end collision
A The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated.
If the airbags have deployed, the following is
recommended:
Have the car transported to an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not drive with deployed airbags.
Have an authorised Volvo workshop replace components in the car's safety system.
Always contact a doctor.
NOTE
The SRS, SIPS, IC and belt tensioner sys- tems are deployed only once during a colli- sion
WARNING
The airbag control module is located in the centre console. If the centre console is drenched with water or other liquid, discon- nect the battery cables. Do not attempt to start the car since the airbags may deploy. Have the car transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. They can make steering difficult. Other safety systems may also be damaged. The smoke and dust created when the airbags are deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/ injury after intensive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid deployment sequence and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin burns.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 29
evastarck
01 Safety
Child safety01
30
Children should sit comfortably and safely
The position of a child in the car and the choice
of equipment are dictated by the child's weight
and size. For more information, see
page 31.
NOTE
Regulations regarding the placement of children in cars vary from country to coun- try. Check what does apply.
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child
to sit on the knee of a passenger.
Volvo's own child safety equipment is
designed for your car. Use Volvo genuine
equipment to best ensure that the mounting
points and attachments are correctly posi-
tioned and are sufficiently strong.
NOTE
If problems arise when fitting child safety products, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.
Child seats
G 02
01 28
Child seats and airbags are not compatible.
Volvo has child safety products that are
designed for and tested by Volvo.
NOTE
When using child safety products it is important to read the installation instruc- tions included with the product.
Do not attach the straps for the child seat to
the horizontal adjustment bar, springs, rails or
beams under the seat. Sharp edges can dam-
age the straps. Allow the back of the child seat
to rest against the dashboard. This applies to
cars without a passenger airbag, or where the
airbag is deactivated.
Location of child seats You may place:
a child seat/booster cushion on the front passenger seat, provided the passenger
airbag is not activated 1.
a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat that uses the back of the front seat as support.
Always place a child in the rear seat if the pas-
senger airbag is activated. A child in the front
passenger seat could suffer serious injury if the
airbag deploys.
WARNING
Never place the child seat in the front seat if the car is equipped with an activated 2
front passenger airbag. If problems arise when fitting child safety products, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.
1 For information on activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS), see page 22 2
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 30
evastarck
see page 22For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS),
01 Safety
Child safety 01
31
WARNING
Booster cushions/child seats with steel braces or some other design that could rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.
Do not allow the upper section of the child seat to rest against the windscreen.
Label Airbag
Label located on instrument panel end face.
Recommended child seats 3
Weight/age Front seat A Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 0
<10 kg
(0 9 months)
Volvo Child seat rear-facing child
seat, secured with the car's seatbelt
and straps.
Type approval: E5 03135
Volvo Child seat rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt, straps and
support legs.
Type approval: E5 03135
Volvo Child seat rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt, straps
and support legs.
Type approval: E5 03135
Britax Baby Safe Plus rear-facing
child seat with ISOFIX fixture system.
Type approval: E1 03301146
Britax Baby Safe Plus rear-facing child
seat with ISOFIX fixture system.
Type approval: E1 03301146
Britax Baby Safe Plus rear-facing child
seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 03301146
3 For other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 31
evastarck
01 Safety
Child safety01
32
Weight/age Front seat A Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 1
9 18 kg
(9 36 months)
Volvo Child seat rear-facing child
seat, secured with the car's seatbelt
and straps.
Type approval: E5 03135
Volvo Child seat rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt, straps and
support legs.
Type approval: E5 03135
Volvo Child seat rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt, straps
and support legs.
Type approval: E5 03135
Britax Fixway rear-facing child seat,
secured with the ISOFIX fixture sys-
tem and straps.
Type approval: E5 03171
Britax Fixway rear-facing child seat,
secured with the ISOFIX fixture system
and straps.
Type approval: E5 03171
Group 2/3
15 36 kg
(3 12 yr)
Volvo Booster cushion with or with-
out backrest.
Type approval: E5 03139
Volvo Booster cushion with or without
backrest.
Type approval: E5 03139
Volvo Booster cushion with or without
backrest.
Type approval: E5 03139
Volvo Integrated booster cushion
available as an option.
Type approval: E5 03140
A For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 22.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 32
evastarck
01 Safety
Child safety 01
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 33
Integrated booster cushions*
G 02
72 11
Volvo's integrated booster cushion for the cen-
tre rear seat is specially designed to provide
optimum safety for children. Combined with
the regular seatbelts the integrated booster
cushion is approved for children weighing
between 15 and 36 kg.
Folding out the booster cushion
G 02
72 09
1. Fold down the booster cushion
2. Pull apart the Velcro
3. Raise the upper portion back into place
Check that:
the seatbelt is in contact with the child's body and is not slack or twisted, and that the seatbelt is positioned correctly across the shoulder.
the lap belt is low over the pelvis for opti- mum protection.
the seatbelt does not lie across the child's throat or below the shoulder.
Carefully adjust the position of the head restraint to suit the child.
WARNING
Repair or replacement should only be per- formed by an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not make any modifications or additions to the booster cushion.
If an integrated booster cushion has been subjected to a major load, such as in con- junction with a collision, the entire booster cushion must be replaced. Even if the booster cushion appears to be undamaged, it may not afford the same level of protec- tion. The booster cushion must also be replaced if it is heavily worn.
Folding in the booster cushion
G 02
72 10
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 33
evastarck
01 Safety
Child safety01
34 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Fold down the upper section.
Secure the Velcro strap.
Raise the booster cushion into the rear seat
backrest.
NOTE
Make sure that both sections of the booster cushion are secured with the Velcro strap (B) before folding down. Otherwise the upper section (A) could become trapped in the rear seat backrest (C) when the booster cushion is folded out again.
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats*
G 01
52 68
Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system
are concealed behind the lower section of the
rear seat backrest, in the outer seats.
The location of the mounting points is indicated
by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see
illustration above).
Press the seat cushion down to access the
mounting points.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to
the ISOFIX mounting points.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 34
evastarck
01 Safety
01
35
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 35
evastarck
G 02
09 01
36 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Overview, left-hand drive car.................................................................. 38
Overview, right-hand drive car................................................................ 40
Combined instrument panel.................................................................... 42
Indicator and warning symbols............................................................... 44
Information display.................................................................................. 47
Switches in the centre console............................................................... 48
Lighting panel.......................................................................................... 51
Left-hand stalk switch............................................................................. 53
Trip computer*........................................................................................ 54
Right-hand stalk switch.......................................................................... 56
Cruise control*........................................................................................ 58
Steering wheel adjustment, parking brake............................................. 60
Electrical socket, cigarette lighter........................................................... 61
Power windows....................................................................................... 62
Rearview and door mirrors...................................................................... 64
Power sunroof*........................................................................................ 69
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 36
evastarck
02 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 37
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, left-hand drive car
02
38
HU-403
DOLBY B NR
COMFORT ADVANCEDSPORT
G 02
72 20
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 38
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, left-hand drive car
02
39
G 02
95 81
Driver's door control panel.
Fog lamps
Headlamps, position/parking lights
Rear fog lamp
Direction indicators, beam selection
Cruise control
Horn
Combined instrument panel
Keypad for phone/audio
Windscreen wipers
Parking brake
Switch panel
Climate control
Audio system
Electric socket, Cigarette lighter
Hazard warning flashers
Glovebox
Panel vents
Display
Temperature gauge
Odometer, trip meter/cruise control
Speedometer
Direction indicators
Tachometer
Outside temperature, clock, gear position
Fuel gauge
Indicator and warning symbols
Panel vents
Instrument lighting
Headlamp levelling
Lighting panel
Reading lamps
Interior lighting
Control, sunroof
Seatbelt reminder
Rearview mirror
Lock button, for all doors
Blocking power windows in the rear doors
Controls, power windows
Controls, power door mirrors
Active chassis FOUR-C
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 39
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, right-hand drive car
02
40
G 02
72 21
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 40
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, right-hand drive car
02
41
G 02
95 81
Driver's door control panel.
Rear fog lamp
Headlamps, position/parking lights
Fog lamps
Windscreen wipers
Keypad for phone/audio
Horn
Combined instrument panel
Cruise control
Direction indicators, beam selection
Parking brake
Electric socket, Cigarette lighter
Climate control
Audio system
Switch panel
Hazard warning flashers
Glovebox
Panel vents
Indicator and warning symbols
Fuel gauge
Outside temperature, clock, gear position
Tachometer
Direction indicators
Speedometer
Odometer, trip meter/cruise control
Temperature gauge
Display
Panel vents
Lighting panel
Headlamp levelling
Instrument lighting
Reading lamps
Interior lighting
Control, sunroof
Seatbelt reminder
Rearview mirror
Lock button, for all doors
Blocking power windows in the rear doors
Controls, power windows
Controls, power door mirrors
Active chassis FOUR-C
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 41
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Combined instrument panel
02
42
G 02
69 73
Temperature gauge Displays the tem-
perature of the engine cooling system. A
message will appear on the display if the
temperature becomes too high and the
gauge goes into the red zone. Bear in mind
that extra lights placed in front of the air
intake, reduce the cooling capacity at high
outside temperatures and high engine
loads.
Display The display shows information
and warning messages.
Speedometer Shows the speed of the
car.
Trip meters T1 and T2 The trip meters are
used for measuring short distances. The
right-hand digit displays tenths of a kilo-
metre. Press the button for more than
2 seconds to reset. Switch between trip
meters with one quick press of the button.
Cruise control indicator - For more infor-
mation see page 58.
Odometer The odometer indicates the
total distance the car has travelled.
Main beam indicator
Warning symbol If a fault arises, the sym-
bol illuminates and a message is shown in
the display.
Tachometer Indicates engine speed in
thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).
Do not allow the tachometer gauge to enter
the red zone.
Automatic gearbox indicator The
selected gear position is displayed here.
Geartronic automatic gearbox and drive
using the manual function, the current
manual gear is displayed.
Outside temperature gauge - Displays the
outside temperature When the tempera-
flake symbol illuminates in the display. This
symbol serves as a warning for slippery
road surfaces. The outside temperature
gauge may show a slightly high reading
after the car are or has been stationary.
Clock - Turn the button to set the clock.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 42
evastarck
ture lies between +2 C to 5 C, a snow-
02 Instruments and controls
Combined instrument panel
02
43
When the lamp in the instrument illumi-
nates the level in the fuel tank is low, refuel
as soon as possible. See also Trip com-
puter page 54.
Indicator and warning symbols
Direction indicators left/right
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 43
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
02
44
Functionality check, symbols
All indicator and warning symbols 1 illuminate
when the ignition key is turned to position II
before starting. This is to check that the sym-
bols are working. When the engine starts, all
the symbols should go out except the hand-
brake symbol, which only goes out when the
brake is disengaged.
If the engine does not start within
5 seconds, all symbols extinguish
except the symbols for a fault in
the car's emissions system and for
low oil pressure. Certain symbols
may have no function, depending
on the car's specifications.
Warning symbols in the centre of the instrument panel
G 02
69 77
These symbols illuminate with a
red or amber glow depending on
the severity of the fault.
Red symbol: 1. Stop the car in a safe place. Do not drive
2. Read the information on the display.
3. Rectify the fault as instructed or contact an
authorised Volvo workshop.
Symbol and message text are visible until the
fault has been rectified.
Yellow symbol: 1. Read the message on the display.
2. Action.
The message text is cleared using the READ
button, see page 47, or it disappears auto-
matically after 2 minutes.
When the message text TIME FOR REGULAR
SERVICE is shown, the symbol and message
text are cleared using the READ button, or dis-
appear automatically after 2 minutes.
Indicator symbols
ABS fault If this symbol illuminates then the
system is not working. The car's
regular brake system continues to
work, but without the ABS func-
tion.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
2. Restart the engine.
3. If the warning symbol remains illuminated,
drive to an authorised Volvo workshop to
have the ABS system checked.
1 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given via display text, see page 189.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 44
evastarck
the car further.
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
02
45
Fault in brake system If this symbol illuminates, the brake
fluid level may be too low.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and check the
level in the brake fluid reservoir, see
page 192.
2. If the reservoir level is below MIN, the car
should not be driven further. Have it towed
to an authorised Volvo workshop to have
the brake system checked.
If the warning symbols for BRAKE
and ABS illuminate at the same
time, there may be a fault in the
brake force distribution system.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
2. Restart the engine.
If both symbols go out, it was an indicator error.
If the warning symbols remain illuminated, check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see page 192.
If the level in the reservoir is below MIN then the car should not be driven any fur- ther. Have the car transported to an authorised Volvo workshop to have the brake system checked.
If the brake fluid level is normal and the symbols remain illuminated, drive the car carefully to the nearest authorised Volvo workshop to have the brake system checked.
WARNING
If the warning symbols for BRAKE and ABS illuminate at the same time, there is a risk that the rear of the car will have a tendency to slide during heavy braking.
Seatbelt reminder This symbol illuminates until the
driver buckles up.
Low oil pressure 2
If this symbol illuminates during
driving then the engine's oil pres-
sure is too low. Stop the engine
immediately and check the engine
oil level. If the symbol illuminates
and the oil level is normal, contact an author-
ised Volvo workshop.
Emissions system If the symbol illuminates then it
may be due to a fault in the car's
emissions system. Drive to an
authorised Volvo workshop to
have the system checked.
Fault in SRS If this symbol remains illuminated
or illuminates while driving, it
means a fault has been detected in
the SRS system (airbags). Drive to
an authorised Volvo workshop to
have the system checked.
Alternator not charging If this symbol illuminates while
driving, there is probably a fault in
the electrical system. Contact an
authorised Volvo workshop.
2 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given via display text, see page 189.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 45
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
02
46
Engine preheater (diesel) This symbol indicates engine pre-
heating. You can start the car
when the symbol switches off.
Applies to diesel cars only.
Parking brake applied The symbol illuminates when the
parking brake is applied. Always
pull the parking brake lever to the
end position.
NOTE
The symbol illuminates irrespective of how hard the parking brake is applied.
Rear fog lamp This symbol is illuminated when
the fog lamp is on.
Trailer indicator lamp Flashes when the direction indica-
tors of the car and trailer are used.
If the symbol does not flash, one of
the direction indicator lamps on
the trailer or car is defective.
Stability systems STC/DSTC The system's different functions
and symbols are described on
page 127.
Reminder doors not closed
If one of the doors or the tailgate is not properly
closed the driver will be reminded of this.
Low speed If the car moves at a speed less than
about 7 km/h then the information symbol illu-
minates and DRIVER DOOR OPEN,
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN, LEFT REAR
DOOR OPEN or RIGHT REAR DOOR
OPEN is shown in the display at the same time.
Stop the car safely as soon as possible and
close the door or bonnet.
High speed If the car is moving faster than
about 7 km/h then the symbol illu-
minates and one of the texts indi-
cated in the previous paragraph
appears in the display at the same
time.
Boot lid reminder If the boot lid is open, BOOT LID OPEN will
appear on the display.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 46
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Information display
02
47
Messages in the display
G 02
69 79
A message appears in the display whenever a
warning or indicator symbol illuminates. Once
you have read and understood the message,
press the READ button (A). Read messages
are then erased from the display and stored in
a memory. Messages regarding faults remain
in the memory until the fault has been rem-
edied.
Very serious fault messages cannot be erased
from the display. They remain in the display
until the fault is remedied.
Messages stored in the memory can be read
again. Press the READ button (A) to see stored
messages. Scroll through the messages stored
in the memory by pressing the READ button.
Press the READ button to return read mes-
sages to the memory.
NOTE
If a warning message interrupts when you are in the trip computer menu or wish to use the phone, you must first acknowledge the
ton (A).
Message Specification
STOP SAFELY Stop the car in a safe
manner and turn off
the engine. Serious
risk of damage.
STOP ENGINE Stop the car in a safe
manner and turn off
the engine. Serious
risk of damage.
SERVICE URGENT Have the car
checked by an
authorised Volvo
workshop immedi-
ately.
SEE MANUAL Read the owner's
manual.
Message Specification
SERVICE
REQUIRED
Have the car
checked by an
authorised Volvo
workshop as soon
as possible.
FIX NEXT SERV-
ICE
Have your car
checked at the next
service interval.
TIME FOR REGU-
LAR SERVICE
Time for regular
service at an author-
ised Volvo work-
shop. The timing is
determined by the
number of kilome-
tres driven, number
of months since the
last service and
engine running time.
SOOT FILTER
FULL SEE MAN-
UAL
Diesel particle filter
requires regenera-
tion, see page 117.
STC/DSTC SPIN
CONTROL OFF
The function of the
stability and traction
control system is
reduced, see
page 127 for more
variants.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 47
evastarck
message. Do this by pressing the READ but-
02 Instruments and controls
Switches in the centre console
02
48 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Switch
G 02
71 94
NOTE
The order of the buttons may vary.
Active chassis FOUR-C* Press the button to select the
Comfort or Sport chassis set-
ting, see page 129. The display
shows the current setting for
10 seconds.
BLIS (Blind Spot Information System)* Press the button to deactivate
or reactivate the function. For
further information, see
page 152.
DSTC system This button is used to reduce or
reactivate the functions of the
DSTC system.
When the lamp in the button is illuminated, the
DSTC system is activated (assuming there is
no fault).
Hold the button depressed for at least half a
second to reduce the function of the DSTC
system. The lamp in the button goes out and
the text DSTC ANTI-SKID OFF is shown in the
display.
The DSTC system is reactivated when the
engine is restarted. For more information, see
page 127.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 48
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Switches in the centre console
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 49
WARNING
Keep in mind that car's driving characteris- tics may change if you deactivate the DSTC system.
Electric socket/Cigarette lighter* The electrical socket can be
used for 12 V accessories, such
as mobile phone chargers and
coolers.
The ignition key must be at least
in position I so that the socket
can supply power.
The cigarette lighter is activated by pushing in
the button. The button pops out when the
lighter is hot. Pull out the lighter and light a cig-
arette on the heated coils. For safety reasons,
always keep the cover in place when the
socket is not in use. Maximum current tap 10 A.
Lowering the outer head restraints in the
rear seat* Do not lower the head restraints
if there is a passenger in one of
the outer seats.
1. Turn the ignition key to position I or II.
2. Press the button to tilt the rear head
restraints forward for a better rear view.
The head restraints are moved back manually.
The head restraints must be in their upright
positions if the rear backrests are to be folded
down.
Retractable power door mirrors* This button is used to fold in the
door mirrors if they are folded
out or to fold them out if they
are folded in.
Proceed as follows if a door mirror has been
accidentally folded in or out:
1. Manually fold the door mirror forward as far
as possible.
2. Turn the ignition key to position II.
3. Fold the door mirror inward and then out-
ward using the button.
The door mirrors have now returned to their
original fixed positions.
Park Assist* The system is always activated
when the car is started. Press
the button to deactivate/reacti-
vate the parking assistance
system, see page 130.
Locking the boot lid* Press this button in order to
lock the boot lid. The boot lid
remains locked even if the
doors are unlocked manually
with the master key, the master
key remote control or the serv-
ice key.
Deactivation of the deadlocks and
detectors* Use this button when you wish
to switch off the deadlocks
function (the deadlocks func-
tion means that doors cannot
be opened from the inside
when locked). This button can
also be used when deactivating the alarm sys-
tem's movement and tilt detectors* - e.g. when
transporting the car by ferry. The lamp illumi-
nates when these systems are shut down/
deactivated, see page 106 and 109.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 49
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Switches in the centre console
02
50 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Auxiliary lamps* Use this button to switch the
auxiliary lamps on with main
beam or to switch them off. The
lamp in the button illuminates
when the function is activated
Active Bi-Xenon lights, ABL* The ABL headlamps' headlamp
pattern follows the movements
of the steering wheel during
driving. The function is acti-
vated automatically when the
car is started and can be deac-
tivated/activated by pressing the button. The
lamp in the button illuminates when the func-
tion is activated
Shifting headlamp pattern for right/left-
hand traffic Hold the button depressed for at least five sec-
onds. The car must be stationary when the
headlamp pattern is shifted.
The message DIPPED BEAM SETT. F.
RIGHT TRAFFIC or DIPPED BEAM SETT. F.
LEFT TRAFFIC is shown in the display. For
more information and adapting headlamp pat-
tern for halogen or Bi-Xenon headlamps, see
page 145.
Hazard warning flashers
G 02
72 79
Use the hazard warning flashers (all direction
indicators flash) when the car is stopped where
it could be a traffic hazard or obstruction. Press
the button to activate the function.
NOTE
Regulations regarding the use of hazard warning flashers vary from country to coun- try.
Door mirror and rear window defrosters Heating is used to quickly
remove misting and ice from
the rear window and door mir-
rors.
Press the switch to start
defrosting the rear window and
door mirrors. The lamp in the
switch illuminates. The light in
the switch is lit
Defrosting is automatically dis-
connected after about
12 minutes.
Heated front seats For further information see
page 76 or 79.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 50
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 51
Headlamps
G 02
71 00
Light switches
Fog lamps*
Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling
Rear fog lamp
Thumbwheel for adjusting instrument light-
ing
Posi- tion
Specification
Automatic/deactivated dipped
beam. Only main beam flash.
Position/parking lamps
Automatic dipped beam. Main
beam and main beam flash
work in this position.
Automatic dipped beam* Dipped beam comes on automatically when
the ignition key is turned to position II, except
when the headlamp control (1) is in the centre
position. If necessary, the automatic dipped
beam can be deactivated by an authorised
Volvo workshop.
Automatic dipped beam, main beam 1. Turn the ignition key to position II.
2. Dipped beam is activated by means of
turning the headlamp control (1) clockwise
to the end position.
3. Main beam is activated by means of mov-
ing the left-hand stalk switch towards the
steering wheel to the end position and
releasing it, see page 53.
The lamps are switched off automatically when
the ignition key is turned to position I or 0.
Position/parking lamps
Position/parking lamps can be switched on
irrespective of ignition key position.
Turn the headlamp control (1) to the centre
position.
When the ignition key is in position II the posi-
tion/parking lamps and number plate lighting
are always on.
Headlamp levelling
The load in the car changes the vertical align-
ment of the headlamp beam, which could daz-
zle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting
the height of the beam.
1. Turn the ignition key to position II.
2. Turn the headlamp control (1) to one of the
end positions.
3. Roll the thumbwheel (3) up or down
respectively to raise or lower beam align-
ment.
Cars with Active Bi-Xenon and Bi-Xenon
headlamps* have automatic headlamp level-
ling, so there is no thumbwheel (3).
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 51
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
02
52 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Instrument lighting
The instrument lighting is switched on when
the ignition key is in position II and the head-
lamp control (1) is in one of the end positions.
The lighting is automatically dimmed during the
day and can be controlled manually at night.
Roll the thumbwheel (5) up or down for
brighter or dimmer lighting.
Fog lamp
NOTE
Regulations for use of fog lamps vary from country to country.
Fog lamps* The front fog lamps can be switched on along
with the headlamps or the position lamps/park-
ing lamps.
Press the button (2), see page 51.
The light in the button illuminates when the
front fog lamps are switched on.
Rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp can only be switched on with
the headlamps or the front fog lamps.
Press the button (4), see page 51.
The rear fog lamp indicator symbol on the com-
bined instrument panel and the light in the
button illuminate when the rear fog lamp is
switched on.
Active Bi-Xenon lights, ABL*
G 02
07 89
The ABL headlamps' headlamp pattern follows
the movements of the steering wheel during
driving. The function is activated automatically
when the car is started and can be deactivated/
activated using the button in the centre con-
sole, see page 50.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 52
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Left-hand stalk switch
02
53
Stalk switch positions
G 02
71 78
Short flash sequence, direction indicators
Continuous flash sequence, direction indi-
cators
Main beam flash
Home safe lighting and switching of
dipped and main beam
Direction indicators
Continuous flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to end
position (2).
The stalk switch remains in its end position and
is moved back manually, or automatically by
steering wheel movement.
Short flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to posi-
tion (1) and release, the stalk switch then
returns to its home position, or move the
stalk switch to position (2) and move it
directly back to the home position.
The direction indicators flash three times.
Short flash sequence interrupted immediately
if indicating is started in the opposite direction.
Switching, main and dipped beam
The ignition key must be in position II for main
beam to be switched on.
1. Turn the headlamp control clockwise to the
end position, see page 51.
2. Move the stalk switch towards the steering
wheel to the end position (4) and release.
Main beam flash
Move the stalk switch gently towards the
steering wheel to position (3).
Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is
released.
Home safe lighting
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept
switched on to work as home safe lighting after
the car has been locked. The standard delay is
30 seconds 1, but can be changed to 60 or
90 seconds.
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
2. Move the stalk switch towards the steering
wheel to the end position (4) and release.
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
1 Factory settings.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 53
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Trip computer*
02
54 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information
G 02
69 56
READ - confirms
Thumbwheel - browse between menus
and options in the trip computer list
RESET - resets
Controls To scroll through trip computer information
turn the thumbwheel (B) either up or down in
steps. Continue turning to return to the starting
point.
NOTE
If a warning message interrupts while you are using the trip computer, this message must be acknowledged. Acknowledge by pressing the READ button and revert to the trip computer function.
Functions
The trip computer displays the following infor-
mation:
AVERAGE SPEED
SPEED IN MILES PER HOUR*
INSTANTANEOUS
AVERAGE
KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK
STC/DSTC, see page 127
Average speed The average speed since the last reset
(RESET). When the ignition is switched off, the
average speed is stored and used as the basis
of the new value when you continue driving.
This can be reset with the RESET button on the
stalk switch.
Speed in miles per hour* Current speed is displayed in mph if the speed-
ometer is graduated in km/h. If it is graduated
in mph then the current speed is shown in mph.
Instantaneous Continuous information on current fuel con-
sumption. Fuel consumption is calculated each
second. The figure in the display is updated
every couple of seconds. When the car is sta-
tionary, " ----" appears on the display. During
the period for regeneration 1 fuel consumption
may increase, see page 117.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if a fuel-driven heater is used.
Average The average fuel consumption since the last
reset. Reset using RESET.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if a fuel-driven parking heater* has been used.
1 Only applies to diesel cars with particle filter.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 54
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Trip computer*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 55
Kilometres to empty tank The calculation is based on the average fuel
consumption over the last 30 km and the
remaining driveable fuel quantity. The display
shows the approximate distance that can be
driven with the fuel quantity remaining in the
tank. No guaranteed range remains when the
display shows " --- kilometres to empty
tank". Refuel as soon as possible.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if a fuel-driven parking heater* has been used or if driving style has been changed.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 55
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Right-hand stalk switch
02
56 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Windscreen wipers
G 02
69 53
Wiper/washer function windscreen.
Thumbwheel
Rain sensor - on/off
Windscreen wipers off The windscreen wipers are off
when the stalk switch is in position
0.
Single sweep Raise the stalk switch to make a
single sweep.
Intermittent wiping You can set a suitable delay
between the sweeps. Turn the
thumbwheel up for a shorter inter-
val between sweeps. Turn it down
to increase the delay.
Continuous wiping The wipers sweep at normal
speed.
The wipers sweep at high speed.
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers during winter ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any snow or ice on the wind- screen is scraped away.
IMPORTANT
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers are cleaning the windscreen. The wind- screen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating.
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor automatically activates the
windscreen wipers based on how much water
it detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of
the rain sensor is adjusted using the thumb-
wheel.
Turn the thumbwheel upwards for higher sen-
sitivity and downwards for lower sensitivity. (An
extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is
turned upwards.)
On/Off When activating the rain sensor, the ignition
key must be in position I or II and the wind-
screen wiper stalk switch must be in position
0 (not activated).
Activating the rain sensor:
Press the button. A lamp in the button illu-
minates to indicate that the rain sensor is
active.
To turn the rain sensor off, either:
Press the button. The lamp in the button goes out.
Press the stalk switch downward to another wiper program. If the stalk switch is raised, the rain sensor will remain active, the wipers make an extra sweep and then return to rain sensor mode when the stalk is released to position 0.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 56
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Right-hand stalk switch
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 57
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated
when the key is removed from the ignition
switch or 5 minutes after the ignition is
switched off.
IMPORTANT
The windscreen wipers could start and be damaged in an automatic car wash. Deac- tivate the rain sensor by pressing button (2) while the ignition key is in position I or II.
Windscreen washer
Pull the stalk switch towards the steering wheel
to start the windscreen washers. The wipers
will make several more sweeps once the stalk
switch is released.
Headlamp washer*
Use of the windscreen washer automatically
activates the headlamp washer.
High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a
large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the
headlamps are only washed every fifth wash
cycle (within a 10 minute period). When ten
minutes have elapsed following the latest
windscreen washing, the headlamps are again
washed with high-pressure with the first wind-
screen washing. Turn the stalk switch toward
the steering wheel to wash the windscreen
only.
Reduced washing
When only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid
remains in the reservoir, the supply to the
headlamps is cut off. This is in order to priori-
tise visibility through the windscreen.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 57
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Cruise control*
02
58 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Activating
G 02
71 77
The controls for cruise control are to the left of
the steering wheel.
Setting the desired speed:
1. Press the CRUISE button. CRUISE is
shown on the combined instrument panel.
2. Touch + or - to lock the vehicle speed.
CRUISE-ON appears in the combined
instrument panel.
Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds
below 30 km/h or above 200 km/h..
Increasing or decreasing speed
G 02
69 49
Increase or decrease the speed by press-
ing and holding + or -. The speed of the car
when the button is released is set as the
new speed.
A brief press (less than half a second) on + or
- changes the speed by 1 km/h.
NOTE
A temporary increase in speed (less than one minute) using the accelerator, such as while overtaking, does not affect the cruise control setting. When you release the accel- erator, the car will return to the programmed speed.
Temporary disengagement
Press 0 to disengage the cruise control tem-
porarily. CRUISE will be shown on the com-
bined instrument panel. The speed set earlier
is stored in the memory.
The cruise control is also temporarily disen-
gaged when:
the brake pedal or clutch pedal is depressed
speed falls when travelling uphill to below
25-30 km/h 1
the gear selector is moved to position N
wheel spin or wheel lock-up occurs
a temporary increase in speed lasts longer than 1 minute
1 Depending on engine type.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 58
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Cruise control*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 59
Return to the set speed Press this button to resume the
previously set speed. CRUISE
ON appears on the combined
instrument panel.
Disengaging
Press CRUISE to disengage the cruise control.
CRUISE ON clears on the combined instru-
ment panel.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 59
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Steering wheel adjustment, parking brake
02
60
Steering wheel adjustment
G 02
73 08
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both
height and reach.
1. Press down the control on the left-hand
side of the steering column.
2. Then adjust the steering wheel to the posi-
tion that suits you best.
3. Press the control back into place to lock
the steering wheel. If this is difficult, press
the steering wheel slightly while pressing
the control back.
WARNING
Adjust the steering wheel before driving off, never while driving. Check that the steering wheel is fixed in position.
Parking brake (handbrake)
G 02
73 07
The lever is located between the front seats.
NOTE
The warning lamp symbol in the combined instrument panel illuminates irrespective of how hard the parking brake is applied.
How to apply the parking brake 1. Press the foot brake down firmly.
2. Pull up the parking brake lever up firmly to
its full extent.
3. Release the foot brake and make sure that
the car is stationary.
4. If the vehicle rolls, the parking brake lever
must be pulled more firmly.
5. When parking a vehicle always put the gear
selector in position 1 (for manual transmis-
sion) or P (for automatic transmission).
Parking on a hill If the car is parked facing uphill; turn the wheels
away from the kerb.
If the car is parked facing downhill, turn the
wheels towards the kerb.
How to release the parking brake 1. Press the foot brake down firmly.
2. Pull the parking brake lever up slightly,
press the button, release the parking brake
lever and release the button.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 60
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Electrical socket, cigarette lighter
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 61
Electrical socket in the rear seat
G 02
71 73
The electrical socket can be used for various
accessories, such as mobile phone chargers
and coolers. It is designed for 12 V. The maxi-
mum current is 10 A.
The ignition key must be at least in position I
so that the socket can supply power.
WARNING
For reasons of safety, always keep the cover in place when the socket is not in use.
Cigarette lighter* Press in the lighter to activate it.
The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pull
out the lighter and light a cigarette on the
heated coils.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 61
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Power windows
02
62
Operating
The power windows are operated using the
controls in the doors. The ignition key must be
in position I or II for the power windows to
operate. The windows continue to work when
the car has stopped and ignition key has been
removed, provided none of the doors is
opened. Operate the windows with caution.
To open a window:
Depress the front of the control.
To close a window:
Raise the front of the control.
NOTE
One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise when the rear windows are open is to also open the front windows slightly.
WARNING
Make sure that children and other passen- gers cannot be trapped in any way when closing the windows. Pay close attention if the rear door windows are controlled from the driver's door or if the windows are closed with the remote control.
Driver's door
G 02
95 82
Controls, power windows.
Front window controls
Rear window controls
The driver can operate all power windows from
the driver's seat. The windows can be opened
and closed in two ways:
Manual operation Depress one of the controls (A) or (B) gen-
tly, or raise them gently. The power win-
dows go up or down as long as the switch
is actuated.
Automatic operation Fully depress one of the controls (A) or (B)
or raise it, then release. The side window
will then open or close automatically. If the
window is obstructed by an object, the
movement will stop.
WARNING
The function that interrupts the movement of the windows in the event of blocking works only with automatic closing, not with manual.
WARNING
If there are children in the car:
Remember to switch off the supply to the power windows by removing the ignition key if the driver leaves the car.
Make sure that children and other passen- gers cannot be trapped in any way when closing the windows.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 62
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Power windows
02
63
Blocking power windows in the rear doors
G 02
95 83
Blocking rear power windows and electric child safety locks*.
The rear power windows can be blocked using
the switch on the driver's door control panel.
The light in the switch is illuminated The rear door windows can only be operated
from the driver's door.
The light in the switch is extinguished The rear door windows can be operated both
with the controls on each rear door and with
the controls on the driver's door.
Front passenger seat
G 02
95 85
The control in the front passenger door oper-
ates that window only.
Rear power windows
G 02
95 86
The rear door windows can be operated with
the control on each rear door or with the switch
on the driver's door.
If the light in the switch for blocking the rear
power windows (located in the control panel in
the driver's door) is lit, the rear door windows
can only be operated from the driver's door.
The windows in the rear doors are operated in
the same way as the windows in the front
doors.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 63
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Rearview and door mirrors
02
64 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Interior rearview mirror
G 02
66 60
Dimming Normal position
Dimmed position
Bright light from behind could be reflected in
the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use
dimming when disturbed by light from behind.
Automatic dimming* Bright light from behind is automatically
dimmed by the rearview mirror.
NOTE
The control is not available on mirrors with automatic dimming.
Interior rearview mirror with compass*
G 02
69 65
The upper left-hand corner of the rearview mir-
ror has an integrated display that shows the
compass direction in which the front of the car
is pointing.
Eight different directions are shown with Eng-
lish abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east),
E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW (south
west), W (west) and NW (north west).
If the compass is activated then it starts auto-
matically in ignition position II or when the
engine is running.
Switch the compass on or off by pressing the
button set into the rear of the mirror. Use a
straightened paper clip for example. The but-
ton is countersunk approximately 2.5 cm in the
mirror.
Set the correct zone for the compass
C A L
Z O N E
C A L
Z O N E
G 02
69 50
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
The correct zone must be selected for the com-
pass to work correctly.
1. Ignition position II.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 64
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Rearview and door mirrors
02
65
2. Press and hold the button on the rear of the
mirror for approximately 3 seconds until
ZONE is shown (use a straightened paper
clip for example). The number for the cur-
rent area is shown.
3. Press the button several times until the
number for the required geographic area
(115) is shown. After several seconds the
display returns to show the compass direc-
tion, this means that the change of zone is
complete.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 65
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Rearview and door mirrors
02
66
G 02
66 77
Magnetic zones for the compass.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 66
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Rearview and door mirrors
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 67
Calibration The compass may need calibrating to work
correctly. For best results, switch off all major
power consumers such as interior lighting,
ventilation fan, heated rear window etc. and
avoid having metal objects and magnetic
objects close to the mirror.
1. Stop the car in a wide open area with the
engine running.
2. Press and hold the button on the rear of the
rearview mirror (use a paper clip or similar)
until CAL is shown again (approx. 6 sec-
onds).
3. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no
more than 8 km/h until CAL disappears
from the display. Which is when calibration
is complete.
Alternative calibration method Drive off as usual. CAL disappears from the
display when calibration is complete.
Door mirrors
G 02
95 87
The controls for adjusting the two door mirrors
are at the front of the driver's door armrest.
1. Press the L button for the left-hand door
mirror or the R button for the right-hand
door mirror. The light on the button illumi-
nates.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the
centre.
3. Press the L or R button again. The light
goes out.
WARNING
Adjust the mirrors before you begin driving.
Door mirrors with memory function* If the car has door mirrors with memory func-
tion, they work together with the memory set-
ting of the seat, see page 89.
WARNING
The driver-side door mirror is wide angled to provide optimal vision. Objects may appear further away than they actually are.
Folding in the door mirrors, see page 49.
Memory function in remote control* When you unlock the car with one of the remote
controls and change the setting of the door
mirrors, these new settings are saved in the
remote control. The next time you unlock the
car with the same remote control and open the
driver's door within five minutes, the mirrors
will assume their stored positions.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 67
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Rearview and door mirrors
02
68 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Laminated side windows*
The laminated windows in the front and rear
doors improve sound insulation in the passen-
ger compartment and provide better protec-
tion against unauthorised entry.
Water and dirt-repellent coating*
The front windows and/or door mirrors are
treated with a coating that ensures that the
view through the windows or in the mirrors is
good even if it is raining.
Side windows and mirrors treated with
the water and dirt-repellent coating are
marked with a small symbol. For information on
glass care, see page 177.
Rearview and door mirrors In certain weather conditions, the function of
the dirt-repellent coating is improved if the
door mirror defrosters are used, see
page 76 or 78.
Defrost the door mirrors:
if they are covered with ice or snow
in heavy rain and dirty road conditions
if they are misted.
IMPORTANT
Do not use a scraper to remove ice from the mirrors as this could scratch the glass and the water and dirt-repellent coating could be damaged.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 68
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Power sunroof*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 69
Open positions
G 02
73 25
The sunroof controls are located in the roof
panel. The sunroof can be opened in two posi-
tions:
Ventilation position, up at the rear edge.
Sliding/comfort position 1, backwards/for-
wards.
The ignition key must be in position I or II.
WARNING
If there are children in the car:
Switch off the supply to the power sunroof by removing the ignition key if the driver leaves the car.
G 02
70 10
Closing, automatic
Closing, manual
Opening, manual
Opening, automatic
Opening, ventilation position
Closing, ventilation position
Ventilation position To open:
Press the rear edge of the control (5)
upward.
To close:
Pull the rear edge of the control (6) down-
ward.
Switch from ventilation position to comfort
position; pull the control rearwards to its end
position (4) and release.
Sliding position
Automatic operation Pull the control past the point of resistance
(3) to the rear end position (4) or past the
point of resistance (2) to the forward end
position (1) and release. The sunroof
opens/closes completely.
In order to open from comfort position to maxi-
mum opening:
Pull the control to the rear once more to the
end position (4) and release.
1 In comfort position, the sunroof is not completely open in order to reduce the level of wind noise.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 69
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Power sunroof*
02
70 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Manual operation To open:
Pull the control rearward to the point of
resistance (3). The sunroof moves toward
the fully open position as long as the button
is held in this position.
To close:
Press the control forward to the point of
resistance (2). The sunroof moves toward
the closed position as long as the button is
held in this position.
WARNING
The sunroof's pinch-protection function only operates during automatic closing, not manual.
Sunscreen
G 02
01 57
The sunroof features a manual, sliding interior
sunscreen. The sunscreen slides back auto-
matically when the sunroof is opened. Grip the
handle and slide the screen forward to close it.
Pinch protection
The sunroof's pinch protection function is acti-
vated if the hatch is blocked by an object. If
blocked, the sunroof will stop and automati-
cally open to the previous position.
WARNING
The sunroof's pinch protection function only operates during automatic closing, not dur- ing manual closing.
Make sure children's hands are clear when closing the sunroof.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 70
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
02
71
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 71
evastarck
G 02
09 06
72 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information on climate control................................................... 74
Manual climate control, AC..................................................................... 76
Electronic climate control, ECC*............................................................. 78
Air distribution......................................................................................... 81
Fuel-driven parking heater*..................................................................... 82
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 72
evastarck
03 CLIMATE CONTROL
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 73
evastarck
03 Climate control
General information on climate control
03
74
Air conditioning
The climate control system cools or heats as
well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger
compartment. The car is equipped with either
manual (AC) or electronic climate control
(ECC).
NOTE
The air conditioning can be switched off, but to ensure the best possible air in the pas- senger compartment and prevent the win- dows from misting, it should always be on.
Misting windows
Reduce the problem of windows misting up on
the inside by cleaning the windows. Use a reg-
ular window cleaner.
Particle filter
Make sure that the multifilter/particle filter is
replaced regularly. Consult an authorised
Volvo workshop.
Ice and snow
Remove ice and snow from the climate control
air intake (the grille between the bonnet and the
windscreen).
Fault tracing and repair
Entrust fault tracing and repair of the climate
control system to an authorised Volvo work-
shop only.
Refrigerant
The climate control system contains R134a
refrigerant. This refrigerant contains no chlo-
rine, which means that it is harmless to the
ozone layer. The system must only be charged
with R134a refrigerant. Have an authorised
Volvo workshop carry out this work.
Cars with ECC
Actual temperature The temperature you select corresponds to the
physical experience with reference to air
speed, humidity, exposure to sun, etc. which
affect the interior and exterior of the car.
Sensors The sun sensor is on the upper portion of the
instrument panel. Remember not to cover it. Do
not cover the passenger compartment tem-
perature sensor on the climate control panel.
Side windows and sunroof To ensure that the air conditioning works sat-
isfactorily, the side windows, and sunroof if
appropriate, should be closed. Also, make sure
the air ducts in the parcel shelf are not blocked.
Acceleration The air conditioning system switches off tem-
porarily at full throttle. You may briefly feel a
temporary rise in temperature.
Condensation In warm weather, condensation from the air
conditioning may drip under the car. This is
normal.
To ventilate the climate system's control sys-
tem the ventilation fan can be started up to 50
minutes after the car's ignition has been
switched off. The fan is then switched off auto-
matically after approx. 15 minutes.
Fuel economy With ECC, the air conditioning system is con-
trolled automatically and is used just enough to
cool the passenger compartment and dehu-
midify the incoming air. This provides better
fuel economy compared to conventional sys-
tems where the air conditioning cools the air to
just above freezing point.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 74
evastarck
03 Climate control
General information on climate control
03
75
Air distribution
G 02
73 30
Incoming air is distributed through several dif-
ferent vents located throughout the car.
Air vents in the dashboard
G 02
73 29
Open
Closed
Lateral airflow
Vertical airflow
Aim the outer vents towards the side windows
to remove misting from the front side windows.
Cold weather: Close the centre vents for opti-
mum comfort and best demisting.
Panel vents in the door pillars
0
G 02
70 64
Open
Closed
Lateral airflow
Vertical airflow.
1. Aim the vents toward the rear side win-
dows to remove misting.
2. Aim the vents inwards in the car for a com-
fortable climate in the rear seat.
Bear in mind that small children can be sensi-
tive to airflow and draughts.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 75
evastarck
03 Climate control
Manual climate control, AC
03
76
Control panel
G 02
72 55
AC On/off (ON/OFF)
Recirculation
Air distribution
Rear window and door mirror defroster
Heated front seats
Heating/Cooling right-hand side
Heating/Cooling left-hand side
Fan
You must turn the fan knob from the 0 -
position to engage the air conditioning.
Use the air conditioning at low temperatures as
well (0-15 C) to dehumidify incoming air.
AC ON/OFF ON: The air conditioning is on.
It is controlled by the system's
AUTO function. This way,
incoming air is sufficiently
cooled and dehumidified. OFF:
OFF
When the defroster function is activated the air
conditioning is automatically switched on (can
be switched off with the A/C button).
Heating/Cooling left/right-hand side Turn to set how warm or cold
the incoming air shall be. For
cooler air, the air conditioning
must be engaged.
Heated front seats Proceed as follows for heated
front seat(s):
1. Press once: High heat both lamps in the
switch illuminate.
2. Press twice: Low heat one lamp in the
switch illuminates.
3. Press twice: Heating switched off no
lamps in the switch illuminate.
An authorised Volvo workshop can adjust the
temperature.
Fan Fan speed can be increased or
decreased by turning the knob.
If the knob is set to 0 then the
air conditioning is not engaged
Rear window and door mirror defrosters Use this button to quickly
remove misting and ice from
the rear window and door mir-
rors, see page 50 for further
information about this function.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 76
evastarck
03 Climate control
Manual climate control, AC
03
77
Recirculation Recirculation can be used to
shut out bad air, exhaust, etc.
from the passenger compart-
ment. The air in the passenger
compartment is recirculated,
i.e. no outside air is taken into
the car when this function is activated. Recir-
culation (together with the air conditioning sys-
tem) cools the passenger compartment more
quickly in a warm climate.
If you allow the air in the car to recirculate, there
is a risk of icing and misting, especially in win-
ter. The timer function minimises the risk of ice,
misting and bad air.
Activate the function as follows:
1. Press for more than 3 seconds. The lamp
flashes for 5 seconds. The air recirculates
in the car for 3 12 minutes depending on
the outside temperature.
2. The timer function is activated each time
you press .
To switch off the timer function:
Press again for more than 3 sec-
onds. The lamp illuminates for 5 seconds
to confirm your selection.
Air distribution Use the air distribution control
positions (marked with dots)
between the different symbols
to fine-tune air distribution for
maximum comfort.
Defroster
The defroster ( ) on the air distribution
control is used to quickly remove misting and
ice from the windscreen and side windows. Air
flows to the windows at high speed.
When the function is selected the following
also takes place to provide maximum dehu-
midification of the air in the passenger com-
partment:
the air conditioning (AC) is automatically engaged (can be switched off with the AC button).
recirculation is automatically disengaged.
When the defroster is switched off, the climate
control returns to the previous settings.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 77
evastarck
03 Climate control
Electronic climate control, ECC*
03
78 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Control panel
G 02
85 76
AC On/off (ON/OFF)
Recirculation/Multifilter with sensor*
Recirculation
AUTO
Air distribution
Passenger compartment temperature sen-
sor
Defroster, windscreen and side windows
Rear window and door mirror defroster
Seat heater right-hand side
Seat heater left-hand side
Temperature right-hand side
Temperature left-hand side
Fan
AUTO The AUTO function automati-
cally regulates climate control
so that the selected tempera-
ture is attained The automatic
function controls heating, air
conditioning, air quality sensor,
fan speed, recirculation and air distribution. If
you select one or more functions manually, the
other functions continue operating automati-
cally. All manual settings are switched off when
AUTO is pressed.
Temperature The two knobs can be used to
set the temperature for the pas-
senger and driver's sides of the
car. Remember that the car
does not heat up or cool down
any more quickly even if you
select a higher or lower temperature than you
want in the passenger compartment.
22 20
18 26 24
Fan Fan speed can be increased
or decreased by turning the
knob. If AUTO is selected
then fan speed is regulated
automatically. The previously
set fan speed is disengaged.
NOTE
If the knob for the fan has been turned so far that the left lamp above the knob illuminates with an orange light, the fan and the air con- ditioning system are switched off.
Rear window and door mirror defrosters Use this button to quickly
remove misting and ice from
the rear window and door mir-
rors, see page 50 for further
information about this function.
Defroster, windscreen and side windows Used to quickly remove misting
and ice from the windscreen
and side windows. Air flows to
the windows at high speed. The
lamp in the defroster button illu-
minates when this function is
engaged.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 78
evastarck
03 Climate control
Electronic climate control, ECC*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79
When the function is selected, the following
also takes place to provide maximum dehu-
midification of the air in the passenger com-
partment:
the air conditioning (AC) is automatically engaged (can be switched off with the AC button)
recirculation is automatically disengaged.
When the defroster is switched off, the
climate control returns to the previous settings.
Air distribution G
02 72
67
Air to windows.
Air to head and body
Air to legs and feet
Press AUTO to return to automatic air distri-
bution.
AC ON/OFF ON: The air conditioning is on.
It is controlled by the system's
AUTO function. This way,
incoming air is cooled and
dehumidified.
OFF: Off.
When the defroster function is activated the air
conditioning is automatically switched on (can
be switched off with the AC button).
Heated front seats Proceed as follows for heated
front seat(s):
1. Press once: High heat both lamps in the
switch illuminate.
2. Press twice: Low heat one lamp in the
switch illuminates.
3. Press twice: Heating switched off no
lamps in the switch illuminate.
An authorised Volvo workshop can adjust the
temperature.
Recirculation Recirculation can be used to
shut out bad air, exhaust, etc.
from the passenger compart-
ment. The air in the passenger
compartment is recirculated,
i.e. no outside air is taken into
the car when this function is
activated.
If you allow the air in the car to
recirculate, there is a risk of
icing and misting, especially in
winter.
MAN AUT
The timer function (cars with Multifilter and air
quality sensor have no timer function) mini-
mises the risk for ice, misting and bad air.
Activate the function as follows:
1. Press for more than 3 seconds. The
lamp flashes for 5 seconds. The air recir-
culates in the car for 3 12 minutes
depending on the outside temperature.
2. The timer function is activated each time
you press .
To switch off the timer function:
Press again for more than 3 seconds.
The lamp illuminates for 5 seconds to confirm
your selection..
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 79
evastarck
03 Climate control
Electronic climate control, ECC*
03
80 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Air quality system* The air quality system consists
of a multi-filter and a sensor.
The filter separates gases and
particles to reduce the levels of
odours and pollution in the pas-
senger compartment. When the
sensor detects polluted outside air, the air
intakes are closed and the air in the passenger
compartment is recirculated.
MAN AUT
A green light (AUT) illuminates in the button
when the air quality sensor is active.
Operation Press AUTO to activate the air quality sensor
(normal setting).
Or:
Select one of the following three functions by
repeatedly pressing AUTO.
The lamp for AUT illuminates The air qual- ity sensor is now activated.
No lamp illuminates. Recirculation is not activated unless needed to cool in a warm climate.
The lamp for MAN illuminates Recircula- tion is now activated.
Keep the following in mind:
Make it a rule to have the air quality sensor activated at all times.
Recirculation is limited in cold weather to avoid misting.
If misting occurs, you should deactivate the air quality sensor.
If misting occurs, you can use the defroster functions for the windscreen, side win- dows and rear window, see page 78.
Follow the Volvo service programme for the
recommended replacement interval of the Mul-
tifilter. If the car is used in environments where
more contaminants are present, it may be nec-
essary to change the Multifilter more often.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 80
evastarck
03 Climate control
Air distribution
03
81
Air distribution Use: Air distribution Use:
Air through front and
rear panel vents.
When you want good
cooling in a warm cli-
mate.
Air to floor. There is a
certain amount of air-
flow to the panel vents
and the defroster
vents for the wind-
screen and side win-
dows.
When you want to
warm your feet.
Air to windows
Air is not recirculated
in this position. Air
conditioning is always
engaged. There is a
certain amount of air-
flow to the panel
vents.
When you want to
remove ice and mist-
ing. High fan speed is
good for this.
Air to floor and panel
vents.
In sunny weather with
cool outside tempera-
tures.
Air to both floor and
windows. There is a
certain amount of air-
flow to the panel
vents.
When you want com-
fortable conditions
and good demisting in
a cold climate. Not too
low a fan speed.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 81
evastarck
03 Climate control
Fuel-driven parking heater*
03
82 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information about heaters
G 02
70 95
READ button
Thumbwheel
RESET button
The electrical system must be "awakened"
before the parking heater can be programmed.
This is most easily done by:
pressing the READ button or
activating main beam or
turning on the ignition.
The parking heater can be started immediately
or set with two different start times using
TIMER 1 and TIMER 2. Here, start time refers
to the time the car is heated and ready.
The car's electronic system calculates when
heating should be started based on the outside
temperature. The heater is not run if the outside
temperature exceeds 25 C. At temperatures
of -10 C and below, the maximum running
time of the parking heater is 60 minutes.
If the parking heater does not start despite
repeated attempts, a message is shown in the
display. Contact an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
WARNING
The car must be outdoors when the parking heater is used.
Switch off the parking heater before refuel- ling. Fuel which spills out could be ignited.
Check in the display that the parking heater is off. (When the parking heater is running, PARK HEAT ON is shown in the display.)
Messages in the display
Once the settings for TIMER 1, TIMER 2 and
DIRECT START have been activated, the
amber warning symbol in the combined instru-
ment panel illuminates and explanatory text is
shown in the display.
When you leave the car, you will receive a mes-
sage regarding the current settings of the sys-
tem. The message disappears when the car is
locked from the outside using the remote con-
trol.
G 02
72 26
Warning decal on fuel filler flap.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 82
evastarck
03 Climate control
Fuel-driven parking heater*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 83
Parking on a hill
If you park your car on a steep incline, the front
of the car should be facing up the slope to
ensure the supply of fuel to the parking heater.
Car clock/timer
For safety reasons, all timer settings will be
cleared if the car clock is reset after timer set-
tings have been made.
Setting TIMER 1 and 2
For reasons of safety, you can only programme
times for the following 24 hours, not several
days in a row.
1. Scroll with the thumbwheel until TIMER 1 is shown in the display.
2. Touch the RESET button so that the hours
setting starts to flash.
3. Scroll with the thumbwheel to the desired
hour.
4. Briefly press the RESET button so that the
minutes setting starts to flash
5. Scroll with the thumbwheel to the desired
minute.
6. Briefly press the RESET button to confirm
your setting.
7. Press the RESET button to activate the
timer.
After setting TIMER 1, scroll to TIMER 2. The
settings are made in the same way as for
TIMER 1.
Deactivating timer-started parking
heater Proceed as follows to manually switch off the
parking heater before the set time has elapsed:
1. Press the READ button (A)
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to the text
PARK HEAT TIMER 1 (or 2). The text
ON flashes on the display.
3. Press the RESET button. The text OFF is
shown with a constant glow and the park-
ing heater is switched off.
Direct start of the parking heater 1. Scroll with the thumbwheel until DIRECT
START is shown in the display.
2. Press the RESET button to access the
options ON or OFF.
3. Select ON.
The parking heater will now run for 60 minutes.
Heating of the passenger compartment will
begin as soon as the engine coolant has
reached an adequate temperature.
Deactivating direct-started parking
heater 1. Scroll with the thumbwheel until DIRECT
START is shown in the display.
2. Press the RESET button to access the
options ON or OFF.
3. Select OFF.
Battery and fuel
If the battery is not sufficiently charged or the
petrol tank is close to empty, the parking heater
will be switched off.
If this is the case, a message will appear in the
display. Acknowledge the message using the
READ button.
IMPORTANT
Repeated use of the parking heater com- bined with short journeys may discharge the battery and impair starting.
If the parking heater is used regularly, the car must be driven for the same time as the parking heater is used in order to ensure that the alternator has time to charge the battery.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 83
evastarck
03 Climate control
Fuel-driven parking heater*
03
84 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Additional heater (diesel)*
Extra heat from the additional heater may be
required in cold weather to reach the correct
temperature in the passenger compartment.
The additional heater starts automatically
when extra heat is required if the engine is run-
ning. It is switched off automatically when the
correct temperature is reached or when the
engine is switched off.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 84
evastarck
03 Climate control
03
85
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 85
evastarck
G 02
09 08
86
Front seats.............................................................................................. 88
Interior lighting........................................................................................ 90
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment..................................... 92
Rear seat................................................................................................. 96
Cargo area.............................................................................................. 97
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 86
evastarck
04 INTERIOR
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 87
evastarck
04 Interior
Front seats
04
88 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Seating position
G 02
72 14
The driver's and passenger seats can be
adjusted to the optimum sitting and driving
positions
Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust
the distance to the steering wheel and ped-
als. Check that the seat is locked after
changing position.
Raise/lower front edge of seat cushion,
pump up/down*.
Raise/lower seat: pump up/down
Lumbar support 1, turn the wheel.
Backrest rake: turn the wheel.
Control panel for power seat.
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat before setting off, never while driving.
Check that the seat is locked in position.
Tipping the front seat backrest*
G 01
48 05
The passenger seat backrest can be folded
forward to make room for long loads.
1. Move the seat as far back as possible.
2. Adjust the backrest to an upright position
90 degrees.
3. Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest
while folding it forwards.
4. Slide the seat forward so that the head
restraint is "locked in place" under the glo-
vebox.
Floor mats*
Volvo supplies floor mats especially produced
for your car
WARNING
The floor mat at the driver's seat must be firmly fitted and secured in the attachment clips to prevent it from being trapped around and under the pedals.
1 Also applies to power seat.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 88
evastarck
04 Interior
Front seats
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 89
Power seat*
G 02
70 36
The seats can be adjusted for a certain time
after unlocking the door with the remote con-
trol without the key being inserted into the igni-
tion switch. The seats can always be set when
the ignition is on.
Front edge of seat cushion up/down
Seat forward/rearward
Seat up/down
Backrest rake
An overload protection is deployed if one of the
seats is blocked. If this happens, turn off the
ignition and wait a short time before adjusting
the seat again. Only one of the seat's motors
can be used at a time.
Seat with memory function*
G 02
70 37
Buttons for memory function.
Store setting 1. Adjust seat.
2. Press and hold button MEM while pressing
button 1, 2 or 3 simultaneously.
Using a stored setting Press one of the memory buttons 13 until the
seat stops. If you release the button then the
movement of the seat will stop.
Key memory in remote control key The driver's seat positions are stored in the key
memory when the car has been locked with the
remote control key. When the car is unlocked
with the same remote control key the driver's
seat and rearview mirrors adopt the stored
positions when the driver's door is opened.
NOTE
The key memory is independent of the seat memory.
Emergency stop If the seat accidentally begins to move, press
one of the buttons to stop the function.
WARNING
Risk of crushing. Make sure that children do not play with the controls.
Check that there are no objects in front of, behind or under the seat during adjustment.
Ensure that none of the backseat passen- gers will be trapped.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 89
evastarck
04 Interior
Interior lighting
04
90
Reading lamps and interior lighting
G 02
69 60
Controls in roof console for front reading lamps and passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamp left-hand front
Interior lighting
Reading lamp right-hand front
Passenger compartment lighting 1 is switched
on and off with a short press on button (2), at
the same time automatic lighting is activated,
see page 91.
All lighting in the passenger compartment can
be switched on in ignition position I and II as
well as when the engine is running. The lighting
can also be activated within 10 minutes after:
the engine has been switched off and the ignition is in position 0
the car has been unlocked but the engine has not been started.
Following which, it is switched off automati-
cally.
Front roof lighting The front reading lamps are switched on and
off using buttons (1) and (3) respectively.
Rear roof lighting
G 02
71 53
Reading lamps, rear.
Reading lamp left-hand rear
Reading lamp right-hand rear
The rear reading lamps are switched on and off
using buttons (4) and (5) respectively.
Courtesy lighting Courtesy lighting (and passenger compart-
ment lighting) is switched on and off respec-
tively when a side door is opened or closed.
1 Courtesy lighting follows the interior lighting.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 90
evastarck
04 Interior
Interior lighting
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 91
Glovebox lighting
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off
respectively when the lid is opened or closed.
Vanity mirror*
G 02
02 10
The light illuminates automatically when the
cover is lifted.
Automatic lighting Automatic lighting can be disengaged by
pressing button (2), see page 90, and holding
it depressed for more than 3 seconds. A short
press on the button re-engages automatic
lighting.
When automatic lighting is activated the pas-
senger compartment lighting is switched on
automatically 2 and remains on for 30 seconds:
the car is unlocked with the key or remote control
the engine is switched off and the key is turned to the 0 position.
Passenger compartment lighting is switched
on and remains on for 10 minutes if one of the
doors is open and the passenger compartment
lighting is not switched off.
The interior lighting is switched off when:
the engine is started
the car is locked with the key or remote control.
The programmed times, 30 seconds and
10 minutes, can be changed by a Volvo work-
shop.
2 The function is light-dependent and is only activated when it is dark.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 91
evastarck
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
04
92
Storage spaces
G 02
72 19
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 92
evastarck
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 93
Sunglasses compartment, driver's side*
Storage pocket
Ticket clip
Cup holder*
Glovebox
Storage compartment in the centre con-
sole
Compartment in door panel
Cup holder in the armrest, rear seat
Storage pocket
WARNING
Ensure that no hard, sharp or heavy objects lie or protrude in such a way that they could cause injury during heavy braking.
Always secure large and heavy objects with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
Storage compartment in centre console
G 02
72 15
Rear storage compartment - The rear stor-
age compartment of the centre console
can be used to store CDs and similar. This
storage compartment can be equipped
with privacy handset + holder*.
Front storage compartment (roller cover) -
This storage compartment can be equip-
ped with the following options:
Cup holder*
Ashtray*
12 V socket
Ashtray*
Rear storage compartment cup holder for rear seat passengers
G 02
72 16
To access the storage compartment/privacy
handset, press the button on the left-hand side
of the armrest and fold the tunnel compartment
cover back.
To use the cup holder, press the button on the
right-hand side of the armrest and fold the
upper part of the tunnel compartment cover
back. The cup holder and cover can be closed
separately.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 93
evastarck
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
04
94 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Cup holder in front storage compartment*
The cup holder can be easily removed:
Press the cup holder forwards,
while lifting it at the rear edge.
Push the cup holder back, into the cut-out,
under the roller cover.
Angle the front edge of the cup holder up
and lift out.
Repeat the procedure in reverse order to refit
the cup holder.
Instrument panel cup holder*
G 02
72 25
Press the holder to open.
Press the holder in after use.
NOTE
Never use glass bottles. Remember also that hot drinks may cause burns.
Glovebox
G 02
73 51
Location of e.g. fuel cards in the glovebox.
The glovebox can be used to store things such
as the owner's manual, maps, pens and petrol
cards.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 94
evastarck
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 95
Coat hanger
G 02
73 28
The coat hanger is only intended for light gar-
ments.
Bottle holder for rear seat passengers*
G 02
72 22
Proceed as follows to use the bottle holder:
1. Open the holder.
2. Insert the bottle.
The bottle holder can also serve as a waste bin.
Insert a bag into the holder and fold it over the
edges.
NOTE
The bin does not require special bags. Use a regular plastic bag.
Cup holder in the armrest, rear seat*
G 02
72 13
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 95
evastarck
04 Interior
Rear seat
04
96
Head restraints in the rear seat
G 02
80 74
Adjusting the vertical position of the head restraint.
The centre seat head restraint can be adjusted
vertically to suit the height of the passenger.
Raise the head restraint as necessary. Raise
the head restraint as needed. The release but-
ton on one of the supports must be pressed to
push the head restraint down. See the illustra-
tion.
Tipping the rear seat backrest
8503282m
G 02
73 27
Both rear seat backrests can be tipped for-
ward, together or individually. This makes it
easier to transport long objects.
Fold the rear seat backrests as follows:
1. First check that the head restraints have
not been lowered.
2. Pull the handle in the cargo area as shown
in the illustration.
3. Fold the backrest forward.
G 02
80 03
A hatch in the right-hand rear backrest allows
you to transport long objects such as skis and
planks.
Open the hatch as follows:
1. Fold the left-hand backrest and centre
armrest forwards.
2. Release the hatch by pushing the catch
upward while folding the hatch forward.
3. Tip the backrest back into position with the
hatch open.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 96
evastarck
04 Interior
Cargo area
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 97
Hatch for long objects
G 02
80 68
Use the seatbelt to secure the load.
Integrated booster cushion The cover on the armrest/child seat has no
hinge. The cover must be removed before the
ski hatch is used.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with integrated booster cushion, fold this out first.
When removing 1. Open the cover 30.
2. Pull straight up.
When fitting 1. Move the cover back in the grooves behind
the upholstery.
2. Close the cover.
WARNING
Always secure the load. Always secure the load. During heavy braking the load may otherwise shift, causing personal injury to the car's occupants.
Cover sharp edges with something soft.
Turn off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading or unloading long objects! Otherwise you may accidentally knock the gear lever or gear selector with the load and cause a gear to engage and the car to move off.
Bag holder*
G 02
72 23
Open the hatch in the cargo area. Hang or
secure your grocery bags using the tensioning
straps.
General Payload depends on the car's total kerb
weight, including any accessories that are
mounted.
Kerb weight includes the driver, the weight of
the fuel tank when filled to 90% and various
fluids, such as washer fluid and coolant.
Mounted accessories, i.e. towbar, load carri-
ers, space box, etc., are included in the kerb
weight.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 97
evastarck
04 Interior
Cargo area
04
98
The load capacity of the car is reduced by the
number of passengers and their weight.
WARNING
The driving characteristics of the car change based on its kerb weight and how heavily it is loaded.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 98
evastarck
04 Interior
04
99
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 99
evastarck
100 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Keys and remote controls..................................................................... 102
Locking and unlocking.......................................................................... 104
Child safety locks.................................................................................. 107
Alarm*.................................................................................................... 108
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 100
evastarck
05 LOCKS AND ALARM
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 101
evastarck
05 Locks and alarm
Keys and remote controls
05
102
Keys
G 03
01 79
Master key This key opens all locks.
The car is delivered with two master keys and
one service key 1. The master keys are collaps-
ible and equipped with an integrated remote
control. The service key does not unlock the
glovebox.
Loss of key If you should lose one of your keys, bring the
remaining keys to an authorised Volvo work-
shop. The code of the missing key must be
erased from the system as a theft prevention
measure. The other keys must be re-coded in
the system at the same time.
The key blades' unique code is available at
authorised Volvo workshops, who can order
new key blades.
A maximum of six remote controls/key blades
can be programmed and used for one single
car.
Immobiliser
The keys are fitted with coded chips. The code
must be accepted by the reader (receiver) in
the ignition switch. The car can only be started
if the correct key with the correct code is used.
NOTE
The master key blade (1) must be fully extended (as illustrated) when starting the car. Otherwise there is a risk that the immo- biliser function will prevent the car from star- ting.
Ignition keys and electronic immobiliser The ignition key must not hang with other keys
or metal objects on the same key ring. The
electronic immobiliser could be activated erro-
neously and the car will not start.
Remote control functions
G 02
70 13
Unlocking
Press the button once to unlock all doors, the
boot lid and the fuel filler flap simultaneously.
Boot lid
Press the button twice to unlock the boot lid
only.
Panic alarm function
The panic alarm function can be used to attract
attention in an emergency.
Press and hold the red button for at least 3
seconds or press it 2 times within the same
1 Certain markets.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 102
evastarck
05 Locks and alarm
Keys and remote controls
05
103
space of time to activate the direction indica-
tors and the horn.
The panic alarm is deactivated automatically
after 25 seconds or by pressing any of the but-
tons on the remote control.
Approach lighting
Do the following when you approach the car:
Press the yellow button on the remote con-
trol.
The interior lighting, position/parking lamps,
number plate lighting and door mirror lamps
(option) will switch on. These lamps will remain
lit for 30, 60 or 90 seconds. An authorised
Volvo workshop can select a suitable time set-
ting.
To extinguish the approach lighting:
Press the yellow button again.
Locking
Lock all doors, boot lid and fuel filler flap with
the button.
There is a delay of approx. 10 minutes for the
fuel filler flap.
Folding/opening key
The key can be folded by pressing the button
while folding the key blade into the keypad.
The folding key will open automatically with
one press of the button.
Changing the remote control battery
G 02
70 11
Replace the battery after repeated failure by
the locks to respond when remote control sig-
nals are transmitted within a normal distance.
1. Remove the cover by carefully prising up
the rear edge of with a small screwdriver.
2. Replace the battery (type CR 2032, 3 V)
with the plus side facing up. Avoid touch-
ing the battery and its terminals with your
fingers.
3. Refit the cover. Make sure the rubber seal
is properly fitted and free from damage to
prevent water from entering.
Turn the old battery in to your Volvo workshop
so that it can be disposed of in an environmen-
tally friendly manner.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 103
evastarck
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
05
104
Locking/unlocking the car from outside
G 02
72 06
The master key or remote control locks/
unlocks all side doors and the tailgate simulta-
neously. The side door lock buttons and inside
handles are disengaged 1
The fuel filler flap can be opened when the car
is unlocked. The flap remains unlocked for
10 minutes after the car has been locked.
The car can be locked1 even if a door or the
boot lid is open. When the door is closed there
is a risk that the keys will be locked in.
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the boot lid is opened
within two minutes of unlocking, all are locked
again automatically. This function prevents the
car from being left unlocked unintentionally.
For cars with alarms, see page 108.
Automatic locking
G 02
96 47
Automatic locking is activated and reactivated
from the control panel in the driver's door.
The function operates by locking the doors
automatically when the speed of the car
exceeds 7 km/h. They remain locked until a
door is opened from the inside or when all
doors are unlocked from the control panel.
Activating/deactivating 1. The ignition key must be in position I or II.
2. Press the READ button in the left-hand
stalk switch to acknowledge any mes-
sages on the display.
3. Press and hold the button for central lock-
ing until a new message for lock status is
shown in the display.
The messages AUTOLOCK ACTIVATED (the
car is also locked when it moves) and
AUTOLOCK DEACTIVATED respectively are
shown on the display.
1 Applies to certain markets
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 104
evastarck
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 105
Locking/unlocking the car from inside
G 02
96 47
All the doors and the boot lid can be locked or
unlocked simultaneously using the control
panel in the driver's door (or passenger door).
All doors can be locked using the lock button
on the control panel by each respective door.
If the car is not locked from the outside then it
can be unlocked by opening the door with the
handle. 2
Unlocking/locking the boot lid
With remote control Proceed as follows in order to unlock the boot
lid only:
Press twice on the remote control button
to open the boot lid.
The boot lid is unlocked and opened
slightly at the same time.
If all doors are locked when the boot lid closes,
it locks automatically.
With master key
G 02
72 08
The master key must only be used during
emergencies for unlocking the boot lid man-
ually, e.g. if the remote control does not func-
tion or the car is without power. Open the boot
lid as follows:
1. Insert the master key into the upper or
lower section of the lid covering the lock.
2. Twist up or down in order to prise the lid
off.
3. Unlock the boot lid.
Service locking, boot lid*
G 02
71 72
2 Applies to certain markets.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 105
evastarck
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
05
106
This function is intended for when the car is left
for service, with a hotel parking valet or similar.
The service key is left with the staff, who can
open and drive the car but do not have access
to the boot lid (or the glovebox if it is locked
with the master key).
To activate service locking 1. Turn the master key to position II.
2. Press the button. A lamp in the button illu-
minates when the function is activated and
a message is shown in the display.
To deactivate service locking Turn the master key to position II and press
the button again.
Locking the glovebox
The glovebox can only be locked/opened
using the master key not with the service key.
Deadlocks
Your car has a special deadlock function,
which means that the doors cannot be opened
from the inside if they are locked.
Deadlocks can only be activated from the out-
side by the driver's door being locked with the
key or remote control. All doors must be closed
before deadlocks can be activated. Once acti-
vated, the doors cannot be opened from the
inside.
The car can only be unlocked from the outside
via the driver's door or with the remote control.
Deadlocks are engaged after a 25 second
delay once the doors have been closed
Temporary deactivation
G 02
72 30
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
doors must be locked from the outside, then
the deadlocks function can be temporarily
switched off.
1. Insert the key into the ignition switch, turn
it to position II and then back to position I
or 0.
2. Press the button.
If the car is equipped with an alarm, movement
and tilt detectors are also deactivated, see
page 109.
The light in the button is illuminated until the
car is locked with the key or the remote control.
A message remains on the display as long as
the key is in the ignition switch.
Next time the engine is started the system is
reset to zero and the deadlocks function and
the alarm's movement and tilt detectors are
then re-engaged.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with an alarm:
Remember that the car's alarm is armed when the car is locked.
If any of the doors are opened from the inside then the alarm will be triggered.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car without deactivating the deadlocks func- tion.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 106
evastarck
05 Locks and alarm
Child safety locks
05
107
Mechanical child safety locks rear doors
The child safety locks are located on the trailing
edge of the rear doors and are only accessible
when the doors are open.
Use a flat metal object, such as a screwdriver,
to turn the control and thus activate or deacti-
vate the child safety lock.
A
B
G 02
15 14
Control for child safety lock left-hand rear door.
G 02
15 15
Child safety lock controls right-hand rear door.
Child-safe position the rear doors cannot
be opened from inside: Turn outwards.
Not child-safe position the rear doors can
be opened from inside: Turn inwards.
NOTE
As long as the child safety lock is activated the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 107
evastarck
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
05
108 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The alarm system
When the alarm is armed, it continually moni-
tors all alarm inputs. The alarm is triggered if:
the bonnet is opened
the boot lid is opened
a side door is opened
the ignition switch is turned with a non- approved key or subjected to force
a movement is detected in the passenger compartment if it is fitted with a movement detector*.
the car is raised or towed away if it is fitted with a tilt detector*.
a battery cable is disconnected.
anyone tries to disconnect the siren.
Alarm indicator
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates
the alarm system's status:
LED not lit the alarm is not armed.
The LED flashes once every other second Alarm is armed.
The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the alarm and until the ignition is switched on the alarm has been triggered.
If there is a fault in the alarm system, a message
appears on the display. Contact an authorised
Volvo workshop.
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm system components. All such attempts could affect the terms of insurance.
Activating the alarm
Press the LOCK button on the remote control.
A long flash signal from the direction indicators
of the car confirms that the alarm is armed and
all doors are closed. In certain markets, the key
or the control in the driver's door can be used
to arm the alarm.
IMPORTANT
The alarm is fully armed when the car's direction indicators have made one long flash and the LED on the instrument panel flashes once every other second.
Deactivating the alarm
Press the UNLOCK button on the remote con-
trol. Two short flashes from the car's direction
indicators confirm that the alarm has been
deactivated.
If the remote control batteries are discharged
then the alarm can be disarmed by turning the
key to ignition position II.
Automatic alarm activation
If none of the doors or the boot lid is opened
within two minutes of the alarm being dis-
armed, and the car was unlocked with the
remote control, the car re-arms the alarm auto-
matically. The car is locked at the same time.
This function prevents you from accidentally
leaving the car without the alarm on.
In certain countries (e.g. Belgium, Israel) the
alarm is reactivated after a certain delay if the
driver's door was opened and closed but the
car was not re-locked.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 108
evastarck
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 109
Deactivating a triggered alarm
Press the UNLOCK button on the remote con-
trol if the alarm sounds and you wish to deac-
tivate it. Confirmation is given by two short
flashes from the direction indicators.
Audio signal Alarm The audio signal is given from a siren with a
reserve battery. Each alarm signal lasts 25 sec-
onds.
Visual signal Alarm When the alarm is triggered, all direction indi-
cators flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm is
deactivated as described earlier.
Reduced alarm level
G 02
72 28
To avoid inadvertently triggering of the alarm -
for example when leaving a dog in the car or
during a ferry crossing - the movement and tilt
detectors can be temporarily switched off.
1. Insert the key into the ignition switch, turn
it to position II and then back to position I
or 0.
2. Press the button.
The light in the button is illuminated until the
car is locked with the key or the remote control.
A message remains on the display as long as
the key is in the ignition switch.
If the car is equipped with the deadlocks func-
tion then it is switched off at the same time, see
page 106.
Next time the engine is started the system is
reset to zero and the movement and tilt detec-
tors and the deadlocks function are then re-
engaged.
Testing the alarm system
Testing the passenger compartment
motion sensor: 1. Open all the windows.
2. Arm the alarm. Activation of the alarm is
confirmed by the lamp flashing slowly.
3. Please wait 30 seconds.
4. Test the movement detector in the pas-
senger compartment, such as by lifting out
a bag from a seat. The alarm will now
sound and flash.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car
with the remote control.
Testing the doors 1. Arm the alarm.
2. Please wait 30 seconds.
3. Unlock the driver's door with the key blade.
4. Open one of the doors. The alarm will now
sound and flash.
5. Repeat the test for the other doors.
6. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car
with the remote control.
Testing the bonnet 1. Get into the car and deactivate the move-
ment detector.
2. Arm the alarm (remain in the car and lock
the doors with the button on the remote
control).
3. Please wait 30 seconds.
4. Open the bonnet with the handle under the
dashboard. The alarm will now sound and
flash.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 109
evastarck
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
05
110 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car
with the remote control.
Testing the boot lid: 1. Arm the alarm.
2. Please wait 30 seconds.
3. Unlock with the key on the driver's side
without opening any of the doors.
4. Open the boot lid with the handle. The
alarm will now sound and flash.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car
with the remote control.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 110
evastarck
05 Locks and alarm
05
111
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 111
evastarck
G 02
09 12
112 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General.................................................................................................. 114
Refuelling.............................................................................................. 116
Starting the car...................................................................................... 118
Manual gearbox.................................................................................... 120
Automatic gearbox................................................................................ 121
All-wheel drive AWD*......................................................................... 124
Brake system........................................................................................ 125
Stability and traction control system*................................................... 127
Active chassis FOUR-C*.................................................................... 129
Parking assistance*............................................................................... 130
Towing and recovery............................................................................. 132
Start assistance.................................................................................... 134
Driving with a trailer.............................................................................. 135
Towing equipment*............................................................................... 137
Detachable towbar*............................................................................... 139
Load on the roof.................................................................................... 143
Adjusting headlamp pattern.................................................................. 145
BLIS (Blind Spot Information System)*................................................. 152
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 112
evastarck
06 STARTING AND DRIVING
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 113
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
General
06
114
Economical driving
Driving economically means driving smoothly
while thinking ahead and adjusting your driving
style and speed to the prevailing conditions.
For more advice on reducing environmental
impact. see page 12.
Keep in mind the following:
Get the engine warmed up as soon as pos- sible! That is to say: do not let the engine idle, but drive with a light load as soon as you can.
A cold engine consumes more fuel than a warm one.
Avoid driving short distances where the engine never has time to reach operating temperature.
Drive gently! Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration and heavy braking.
Do not drive with unnecessary, heavy loads in the car.
Do not use winter tyres when the roads are clear and dry.
Remove the load carrier when it is not in use.
Do not open side windows unnecessarily.
Do not drive with an open boot lid!
If you drive with the boot lid open, some of the
exhaust gases and poisonous carbon monox-
ide could be sucked into the car through the
cargo area. If you must drive a short distance
with the boot lid open, proceed as follows:
1. Close all windows.
2. Distribute the air between the windscreen
and floor while running the fan at high
speed.
Your new car slippery road surfaces
Driving on a slippery road may feel different
depending on whether you choose a car with a
manual or an automatic gearbox. Practice skid
driving under controlled conditions so that you
know how your new car reacts.
Driving in water
The car can be driven through water at a maxi-
mum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of
10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercised
when passing through flowing water.
IMPORTANT
Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter.
In greater depths, water can enter the trans- mission. This reduces the lubricating ability of the oils and shortens the service life of the systems.
During driving in water, maintain a low speed
and do not stop the car. When the water has
been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly
and check that full brake function is achieved.
Water and mud for example can make the
brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake
function.
NOTE
Clean the electric contacts of the electric engine block heater and trailer coupling after driving in water and mud.
IMPORTANT
Do not let the car stand with water over the sills for any long period of time. This could cause electrical malfunctions.
In the event of engine stop in water do not try restart. Tow the car from the water.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 114
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
General
06
115
Do not overload the battery
The electrical functions in the car load the bat-
tery to varying degrees. Avoid having the igni-
tion key in position II when the engine is turned
off. Use position I instead, as less power is
used. The 12 volt outlet in the cargo area sup-
plies power even when the ignition key is
removed.
Examples of functions that use a lot of power:
ventilation fan
windscreen wipers
audio system
parking lights
Also, be aware of different accessories that
load the electrical system. Do not use functions
which use a lot of power when the engine is
switched off.
A text is shown in the display in the combined
instrument panel if battery voltage is low. This
message remains in the display in the com-
bined instrument panel until the engine has
started.
The energy-saving function shuts down certain
functions or reduces the load on the battery by,
for example, slowing the ventilation fan and
switching off the audio system.
Charge the battery by starting the engine.
Do not allow the engine and cooling system to overheat
Under certain conditions, e.g. when driving in
hilly terrain and with a heavy load, there is a risk
of the engine and cooling system overheating.
To avoid overheating in the cooling
system:
Drive at low speeds if driving with a trailer up a long incline.
Switch off the air conditioning temporarily.
Avoid letting the engine idle.
Do not turn the engine off immediately you stop, if the car has been driven hard.
Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of the grille if driving in extreme high tem- peratures.
To avoid the engine overheating: Do not exceed engine speeds of 4500 rpm
(diesel engines: 3500 rpm) if driving with a
trailer or caravan in hilly terrain. The oil tem-
perature could then become too high.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 115
evastarck
Especially in warm weather.
06 Starting and driving
Refuelling
06
116
Opening the fuel filler flap
G 02
70 73
The fuel cap is inside the fuel filler flap on the right- hand rear wing and hangs up on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
The fuel filler flap can be opened when the car
is unlocked.
NOTE
The filler flap remains unlocked for ten minutes after the car has been locked.
Emergency opening of the fuel filler flap
G 02
72 12
The fuel filler flap can be opened manually
when necessary if it cannot be opened nor-
mally.
1. There is a detachable hatch on the right-
2. insert your hand and locate the flap's elec- trical lock location is approximately inside the rear edge of the fuel filler flap.
3. Pull the lock plunger straight back.
WARNING
There are sharp edges behind the panel so move your hands slowly and carefully.
Fuel cap
A certain overpressure may arise in the tank in
the event of high outside temperatures. Open
the cap slowly.
NOTE
After refuelling, replace the fuel cap and turn until one or more clicks is heard.
WARNING
Never carry an activated mobile phone when refuelling the ring signal could cause spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to fire and injury.
Refuelling with petrol
Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump
nozzle cuts out.
NOTE
Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot weather.
Do not add cleaning additives unless spe- cifically recommended by a Volvo work- shop.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 116
evastarck
hand panel of the cargo area. Undo this.
06 Starting and driving
Refuelling
06
117
IMPORTANT
Petrol-powered cars must always be refu- elled with unleaded petrol so as not to dam- age the catalytic converter.
Refuelling with diesel
At low temperatures (-5 C to -40 C), a paraffin
precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which
can lead to ignition problems. Make sure you
use a special winter grade fuel during cold peri-
ods.
Diesel particle filter (DPF)
Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter,
which results in more efficient emission con-
trol. The particles in the exhaust gases are
collected in the filter during normal driving. So-
called "regeneration" is started in order to burn
away the particles and empty the filter. This
requires the engine to have reached normal
operating temperature.
Regeneration of the filter takes place automat-
ically at an interval of approximately
300 900 km depending on driving conditions.
Regeneration normally takes 10-20 minutes. It
may take a little longer at a low average speed.
Fuel consumption may increase slightly during
regeneration.
Regeneration in cold weather If the car is frequently driven short distances in
cold weather then the engine does not reach
normal operating temperature. This means that
regeneration of the diesel particle filter does
not take place and the filter is not emptied.
When the filter has become approximately
80% full of particles, a yellow warning triangle
illuminates on the instrument panel, and the
message, SOOT FILTER FULL SEE
MANUAL is shown on the instrument panel
display.
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car
until the engine reaches normal operating tem-
perature, preferably on a main road or motor-
way. The car should then be driven for
approximately 20 minutes more. When regen-
eration is underway the engine power is
reduced.
When regeneration is complete the warning
message is cleared automatically.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that
the engine reaches normal operating tempera-
ture more quickly.
IMPORTANT
If the filter fills up it may be incapable of functioning. Then it can be difficult to start the engine and there is a risk that the filter will have to be replaced.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 117
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Starting the car
06
118
Before starting the engine
Apply the parking brake.
Automatic gearbox Gear selector in position P or N.
Manual gearbox Put the gear lever in neutral and hold the clutch
pedal fully depressed. This is particularly
important in very cold conditions.
WARNING
Never remove the ignition key from the steering lock while driving or when the car is being towed. The steering lock could oth- erwise be activated, making it impossible to steer the car.
The ignition key must be in position II when the car is being towed.
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higher than normal for certain engine types during cold starting. This is in order that the emis- sions system can reach normal operating temperature as quickly as possible, which minimises exhaust emissions and protects the environment.
The master key blade must be fully extended (see illustration on page 102) when starting the car. Otherwise there is a risk that the immobiliser function will pre- vent the car from starting.
Starting the engine
Petrol Turn the ignition key to the start position.
If the engine does not start within 5-10 sec-
onds, release the key and repeat the start
attempt.
Diesel Turn the ignition key to the drive position.
An indicator symbol in the combined instru-
ment panel illuminates to show that engine
preheating is underway, see page 46.
Turn the ignition key to the start position when
the indicator symbol goes out.
Ignition switch and steering lock
0 Locked position The steering wheel locks
when the ignition key is
removed.
I Radio position Certain electrical compo-
nents can be switched on.
The engine's electrical sys-
tem is not activated.
II Driving position The key position when driv-
ing. The car's entire electrical
system is energised.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 118
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Starting the car
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 119
III Start position The starter motor is engaged.
When the key is released it
springs back automatically to
the driving position, once the
engine has started. If the key
is hard to turn, the front
wheels may be turned in such
a way that there is tension in the steering wheel
lock. In which case, turn the wheel back and
forth to make it easier to turn the key.
Ensuring that the steering wheel is locked
when you leave the car minimises the risk of
theft.
Ignition keys and electronic immobiliser
The ignition key must not hang with other keys
or metal objects on the same key ring. The
electronic immobiliser could be activated acci-
dentally. If this happens, remove the excess
keys and restart the car.
Never rev the engine hard straight after a cold
start! If the engine does not start or misfires,
contact a Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Never remove the ignition key from the steering lock while driving or when the car is being towed. Never switch off the ignition (key to position 0) or remove the ignition key while the car is in motion. The steering lock could otherwise be activated, making it impossible to steer the car.
Speed related power steering*
If the car is equipped with speed related power
steering this means that it is easier to steer at
low speeds, which in turn facilitates parking
etc.
As speed is increased the steering force is
adapted to give the driver enhanced sensitivity.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 119
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Manual gearbox
06
120
Gear positions, five-speed
G 02
73 05
Depress the clutch pedal fully during each gear
change. Take your foot off the clutch pedal
between gear changes. Follow the shifting pat-
tern indicated.
For the best possible fuel economy, use the
highest gear possible as often as possible.
Reverse gear inhibitor
G 02
79 95
The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil-
ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse
gear during normal forward travel.
Only engage reverse gear when the car is sta-
tionary.
To engage reverse gear, the gear lever must
first be moved to neutral (between 3rd and 4th
gear). Accordingly, reverse cannot be directly
engaged from 5th gear due to the reverse gear
inhibitor.
Gear positions, six-speed
G 02
71 99
Depress the clutch pedal fully during each gear
change. Take your foot off the clutch pedal
between gear changes. Follow the shifting pat-
tern indicated.
For the best possible fuel economy, use the
highest gear possible as often as possible.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 120
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
06
121
Manual positions
G 03
11 05
P Park Select this position when you wish to start the
engine or park the car.
The car should be stationary when you select
P!
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the
P position is engaged. Always apply the park-
ing brake when parking the car!
R Reverse The car should be stationary when you select
R!
N Neutral N is the neutral position. No gear is engaged
and the engine can be started. Apply the park-
ing brake when the car is stationary with the
gear selector in position N.
D Drive D is the normal driving position. The car auto-
matically shifts between the different gears of
the gearbox based on the level of acceleration
and speed. The car must be stationary when
the gear selector is moved to position D from
position R.
4 Low gear Up and downshifts between 1st, 2nd, 3rd and
4th are automatic. There is no upshift to 5th
gear.
Position 4 can be used:
for mountain driving
when driving with a trailer
to increase engine braking
3 Low gear Up and downshifts between 1st, 2nd and 3rd
are automatic. There is no upshift to 4th gear.
Position 3 can be used:
for mountain driving
when driving with a trailer
to increase engine braking
L Low gear Select L if you wish to drive in 1st or 2nd. Posi-
tion L gives the best engine braking for moun-
tain driving, etc.
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor
G 03
11 09
The gear selector can be moved forward and
back freely between N and D. Other positions
are locked with a latch that is released with the
inhibitor button on the gear selector.
Press the inhibitor button to move the lever for-
ward or back between the different gear posi-
tions.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 121
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
06
122
Geartronic
G 02
79 97
Gear positions To move from the automatic driving position
D to a manual position, move the gear selector
to the left.
To go from position MAN to the automatic driv-
ing position D, move the selector to position
D.
Manual positions
G 02
02 37
To move from the automatic driving position
D to a manual position, move the gear selector
to the left. To go from position MAN to the
automatic driving position, move the selector
to position D.
While driving The manual gearshift mode can be selected at
any time while driving. The engaged gear is
locked until you choose another gear. The car
will only shift down automatically if you slow
down to a very slow speed.
If the gear selector is moved to (minus) the
car changes down a gear and engine brakes at
the same time. If the gear selector is moved to
+ (plus) the car changes up a gear.
W Winter
The W button by the gear selector
engages and disengages the win-
ter programme W. The symbol W is shown in the combined instru-
ment panel when the winter pro-
gramme is activated.
The winter programme starts the gearbox in
3rd gear to make it easier to pull off on slippery
roads. When the programme is engaged, lower
gears are activated only by kick-down.
The W programme can only be selected in
position D.
Kick-down
When the accelerator is pressed all the way to
the floor, beyond the position normally regar-
ded as full acceleration, a lower gear is imme-
diately engaged. This is known as kick-down.
When maximum speed for this gear is reached,
or if the accelerator is released from the kick-
down position, the gearbox automatically
changes up.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 122
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
06
123
Kick-down is used when maximum accelera-
tion is needed, such as for overtaking.
To prevent overrevving, the gearbox control
program has a protective downshift inhibitor.
The kick-down function 1 cannot be used in the
manual positions. Return to automatic position
D.
Cold start
When starting in low temperatures, the gear
changes can sometimes feel hard. This is due
to the gearbox oil's viscosity at low tempera-
tures. To reduce engine emissions, the gear-
box shifts up later than normal when the engine
is started at low temperatures.
Turbo engine When the engine is cold, the transmission
shifts gears at higher revs. This allows the cat-
alytic converter to reach normal operating tem-
perature more quickly, with less exhaust emis-
sions.
Adaptive system
The gearbox is controlled by what is known as
an adaptive system. The system continually
monitors how the gearbox is behaving and
senses every gear change for optimum change
quality.
Lock-up function The gears have a lock-up function (locked
gears), which gives better engine braking and
lower fuel consumption.
Safety systems
Cars with an automatic gearbox have special
safety systems:
Keylock To remove the ignition key, the gear selector
must be in the P position. The key is locked in
all other positions.
Parking position (P) Stationary car with engine running:
Keep your foot on the brake pedal when
moving the gear selector to another posi-
tion.
Electric gear inhibitor Shiftlock Parking
position (P position) To be able to move the gear selector from the
P position to other gear positions, the ignition
key must be in position I or II and the brake
pedal must be depressed.
Neutral position (N position) To be able to move the gear selector from the
N position to other gear positions, the ignition
key must be in position I or II and the brake
pedal must be depressed.
1 Only applies to Geartronic.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 123
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
All-wheel drive AWD*
06
124 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
All-wheel drive is always engaged
All-wheel drive means that all four road wheels
are driven at the same time. The power is auto-
matically distributed between the front and rear
wheels. An electronically controlled clutch sys-
tem distributes the power to the pair of wheels
that grips best. This provides the best traction
and prevents wheel spin.
Under normal driving conditions, the majority
of power is transmitted to the front wheels.
All-wheel drive improves driving safety in rain,
snow and icy conditions.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 124
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Brake system
06
125
Brake servo
If the car is rolling or is being towed with the
engine turned off, the brake pedal must be
pressed about five times harder than when the
engine is running. If the brake pedal is
depressed when the engine is started, you will
feel the pedal drop. This is normal and due to
the brake servo becoming active. This may be
more noticeable if the car has Emergency
Brake Assistance (EBA).
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the engine is running.
NOTE
If braking with the engine switched off, press the brake pedal sharply once, not repeatedly.
Brake circuits
This symbol illuminates if a brake
circuit is not working.
If a fault should occur in one of the
circuits, it is still possible to brake
the car. The brake pedal will travel further and
may feel softer than normal. Harder pressure
on the pedal is needed to produce the normal
braking effect.
Dampness can affect braking
characteristics Brake components become wet when the car
is driven in heavy rain, through pools of water
or when the car is washed. This may alter brake
pad friction characteristics so that there is a
delay before braking effect is noticed.
Press the brake pedal lightly from time to time
if driving for long stretches in rain or slushy
snow, as well as after setting off in very damp
or cold weather. This warms up the brake pads
and dries off any water. This precaution is also
recommended before parking the car for a long
period in such weather conditions.
If the brakes are used heavily When driving in the Alps or other roads with
similar characteristics, the car's brakes are
heavily loaded even if the brake pedal is not
being depressed especially hard.
Because speed is often low, the brakes are not
cooled as effectively as when driving on flat
roads at higher speed.
So as not to overload the brakes, shift down
when driving downhill instead of using the foot
brake. Use the same gear driving downhill as
you would use driving uphill. This uses engine
braking more efficiently so the foot brake is
only required for brief periods.
Bear in mind that driving with a trailer puts an
additional load on the car's brakes.
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
The ABS system (Anti-lock Braking
System) is designed so that the
wheels do not lock when braking.
This retains the best possible
steering response when braking.
This improves your ability to swerve to avoid
obstacles. The ABS system does not increase
your total braking capacity. However, as the
driver you have increased ability to steer and
thus better control over the car, which in turn
increases safety.
After the engine has started and has reached a
speed of about about 20 km/h, a short self-test
can be both heard and felt. When the ABS sys-
tem functions, you can hear and feel pulses in
the brake pedal. This is completely normal.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 125
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Brake system
06
126
NOTE
You must depress the brake pedal fully to take maximum advantage of the ABS sys- tem.
Do not release the pedal when you hear and feel the ABS pulses.
Practice braking with the ABS system at a suitable location such as a skid pan to prac- tice skidding.
The ABS symbol illuminates:
for approximately two seconds during the system test when the car is started.
if the ABS system has shut down due to a fault.
WARNING
If the BRAKE and ABS warning symbols illu- minate at the same time, there may be a fault in the brake system. If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is normal at this stage, drive carefully to the nearest authorised Volvo workshop and have the brake system checked.
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.
Electronic brake force distribution system EBD
The Electronic Brakeforce Distribution system
(EBD) is an integrated part of the ABS system.
The EBD system controls the brake force to the
rear wheels so that the best possible braking
force is always available. Pulses will be heard
and felt through the brake pedal when the sys-
tem regulates brake force.
Emergency Brake Assistance EBA
The Emergency Brake Assistance function
(EBA) is integrated in the DSTC system and is
designed to provide immediate maximum
brake force whenever rapid braking is neces-
sary. The system detects the need for heavier
braking by registering how quickly the brake
pedal is applied.
The EBA function is active at all speeds. For
safety reasons, it cannot be switched off.
When the EBA function is activated, the brake
pedal sinks while maximum braking force is
applied. Continue braking without releasing
the brake pedal. The EBA function disengages
when the pressure on the brake pedal is
released.
NOTE
When EBA is activated the brake pedal low- ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold) the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the brake pedal is released then all braking ceases.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 126
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Stability and traction control system*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 127
General
The Dynamic Stability and Traction Control
system (STC/DSTC) improves the car's trac-
tion and helps the driver to avoid skidding.
A pulsing sound may be noticed during braking
or acceleration when the system is in action.
The car may accelerate slower than expected
when the accelerator pedal is depressed.
The car is equipped with either STC or DSTC
depending on market. The table shows the
integral functions of the respective systems.
Function/sys- tem
STC DSTC
Active Yaw Control X
Spin Control X X
Traction control
system
X X
Active Yaw Control The function limits the driving and brake force
of the wheels individually in order to stabilise
the car.
Spin Control The function prevents the driving wheels from
spinning against the road surface during accel-
eration.
Traction control system The function is active at low speed and trans-
fers power from the driving wheel that is spin-
ning to the one that is not.
Reduced operation
G 02
85 11
Thumbwheel
RESET button
System operation during skidding and accel-
eration can be partially deactivated.
Operation during skidding is then delayed and
so allows more skidding which provides
greater freedom for dynamic driving. Traction
in deep snow or sand is improved at the same
time as acceleration is no longer limited.
Operation Turn the thumbwheel (1) until the STC/
DSTC menu appears.
DSTC ON means that the system function is
unchanged.
DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF means that sys-
tem operation is reduced.
Press and hold RESET (2) until the STC/
DSTC menu is changed.
At the same time the symbol illuminates as
a reminder that the system has been reduced.
The system remains reduced until the engine is
next started.
WARNING
Suppressing system function may alter the driving characteristics of the car.
NOTE
DSTC ON is shown for several seconds in the display each time the engine is started.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 127
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Stability and traction control system*
06
128 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Messages in the display
TRACTION CONTROL TEMPORARILY
OFF means that the system has been tempo-
rarily reduced due to excessive brake tempera-
ture.
The function is reactivated automatically when
the brakes have cooled.
ANTI-SKID SERVICE REQUIRED system
disabled due to a fault.
Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
If the message remains when the engine is restarted, drive to an authorised Volvo workshop.
Symbols in the combined instrument panel
Symbol for STC/DSTC The symbol has different meanings
depending on how it is shown.
The symbol illuminates and goes out
again after approx. 2 seconds Indicates system check when the engine is
started.
The symbol flashes Indicates that the system is operating.
The symbol illuminates and stays lit ANTI-SKID SERVICE REQUIRED is shown in
the display at the same time.
Fault indicator in STC/DSTC system:
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
2. Restart the car.
If the warning symbol goes out, the fault was temporary and it is not necessary to visit a workshop.
If the warning symbol remains lit, drive to an authorised Volvo workshop to have the system checked.
The symbol illuminates and stays lit DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF is shown in the
display at the same time.
Reminds that the STC/DSTC system has been
reduced.
Symbol for Warning The symbol illuminates with a con-
stant yellow glow.
TRACTION CONTROL
TEMPORARILY OFF is shown in
the display at the same time.
Indicates that the system has been temporarily
reduced due to excessive brake temperature.
Automatic reactivation of the function takes place when the brake temperature has returned to normal.
WARNING
Under normal driving conditions, the STC/ DSTC system improves the car's road safety, but this should not be taken as a reason to increase speed.
Always follow the usual precautions for safe cornering and driving on slippery road sur- faces.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 128
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Active chassis FOUR-C*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 129
General information on the Active chassis - FOUR-C
Switch in centre console for
FOUR-C
The car is equipped with an
extremely advanced active
chassis system Continuously
Controlled Chassis Concept
that is regulated electronically. The functions of
the system are based on a number of sensors
that continually monitor the car's movements
and reactions, such as vertical and lateral
acceleration, vehicle speed and wheel move-
ments.
The FOUR-C control unit analyses data from
the sensors and performs the necessary shock
absorber setting adjustments up to 500 times
per second. This results in extremely fast and
accurate individual shock absorber control.
This contributes to variations in chassis cha-
racteristics.
Chassis characteristics can be modified at any
time while driving, when the nature of the road
changes or when you desire a change in driving
style. This change occurs in a matter of milli-
seconds.
Comfort Comfort mode adjusts the chassis setting so
that the body is insulated from uneven sections
of the road surface, which allows for better
"glide". Shock absorption is softer and body
movements are minimal. This setting is recom-
mended for long-distance driving or driving on
slippery road surfaces.
When the ignition is switched off in Comfort
setting, the chassis will resume the same mode
when the car is re-started.
Sport In Sport mode, steering responses are quicker
than in Comfort mode. Shock absorption is
harder and the body follows the road in order
to reduce rolling during fast cornering. The car
feels sportier.
When the ignition is switched off in Sport set-
ting, the chassis will resume the same mode
when the car is re-started.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 129
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Parking assistance*
06
130 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General 1
G 02
02 94
Parking assistance front and rear.
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.
A signal indicates the distance to a detected
object.
WARNING
Parking assistance does not relinquish the driver's own responsibility during parking. The sensors have blind spots where objects cannot be detected. Be aware of children and animals near the car
Variants Parking assistance is available in two variants:
Rear only
Both front and rear.
Function The system is switched on automatically when
the car is started at which point the lamp in the
switch for parking assistance illuminates. The
display shows the text message PARK
ASSIST ACTIVE if reverse gear is engaged or
if the front sensors detect an object.
Parking assistance is active at speeds below
15 km/h. The system is deactivated at higher
speeds. When the speed is below 10 km/h the
system is reactivated.
The frequency of the signal increases as you
come closer to an object in front of or behind
the car. If the volume of another audio source
from the audio system is high, then this is auto-
matically lowered.
The tone becomes constant at a distance of
about 30 cm. If there are objects within this
distance behind or in front of the car, the signal
alternates between left and right-hand speak-
ers.
Rear parking assistance The distance covered to the rear of the car is
about 1.5 m. Rear parking assistance is acti-
vated when reverse gear is engaged. The sig-
nal comes from the rear loudspeakers.
The system must be deactivated when revers-
ing with a trailer, or bike carrier on the towbar
or similar. Otherwise the trailer or bike carrier
would trigger the sensors.
Rear parking assistance is deactivated auto-
matically when towing a trailer if a Volvo gen-
uine trailer cable is used.
Front parking assistance The distance covered to the front of the car is
about 0.8 metres. The signal comes from the
front loudspeakers.
Front parking assistance cannot be combined
with extra lights because the sensors are affec-
ted by the extra lights.
Fault indicator If the yellow warning symbol illu-
minates and the display shows
PARK ASSIST SERVICE
REQUIRED then parking assis-
tance is disengaged.
1 Depending on the market, the Parking assistance system may be either Standard, Option or Accessory.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 130
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Parking assistance*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 131
IMPORTANT
In certain conditions the parking assistance system may produce incorrect warning sig- nals that are caused by external sound sources that emit the same ultrasonic fre- quencies that the system works with.
Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
Off/On G
02 71
04
Button position in the row may vary.
Parking assistance can be deactivated with the
button in the switch panel. The lamp in the
switch goes out. Parking assistance is
switched on again with the switch and the lamp
illuminates.
Cleaning the sensors
G 02
69 46
Parking assistance sensors.
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to
ensure that they work properly. Clean them
with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 131
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Towing and recovery
06
132
Start assistance
Use a donor battery if the battery is discharged
and the engine does not start. Do not tow the
car to bump start it, see page 134.
IMPORTANT
Bump starting the car can damage the cat- alytic converter.
Towing
Find out the highest legal speed for towing
before towing the car.
The car must always be towed facing forward.
1. Unlock the steering wheel lock so that the
car can be steered.
2. For the driver of the towing vehicle: Drive
gently.
For the driver of the vehicle being towed:
Keep the towline taut by holding your foot
gently pressed on the brake pedal in order
to avoid unnecessary jerking.
WARNING
The steering lock must be unlocked before towing.
The ignition key must be in position II.
Never remove the ignition key from the ignition switch while driving or when the car is being towed.
WARNING
The brake servo and power steering do not work when the engine is switched off. The brake pedal must be pressed about five times harder than normal, and the steering will be considerably heavier than normal.
Manual gearbox Move gear lever into neutral and release
the parking brake.
Automatic gearbox Move the gear selector to position N and
release the parking brake.
Cars with automatic gearbox must not be
towed at speeds above 80 km/h or further than
80 km.
Towing eye Before towing the towing eye must be bolted
securely onto the bumper. The socket and
cover for the towing eye are on the right-hand
side of each bumper.
The towing eye is in the tool kit in the cargo
area.
A
B C
G 02
80 91
Towing eye, front
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 132
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Towing and recovery
06
133
A
B
C
G 02
80 93
Towing eye, rear
Proceed as follows:
1. Release the cover 1 (A) by carefully prizing
in the groove with a coin for example.
2. Screw the towing eye (B) securely into
place up to the flange (C). You can use a
wheel wrench.
To screw in the rear towing eye, you must
first remove a plastic bolt from the bracket
for the rear towing eye. Use the wheel
wrench from the tool kit to unscrew the
plastic bolt. Refit the plastic bolt after use.
After use, unscrew the towing eye and refit the cover.
NOTE
On certain cars with fitted towbar the towing eye cannot be secured in the rear mounting. In which case, secure the tow rope in the towbar. For this reason, it is advisable to always store the detachable towbar in the car.
Recovery
The car must always be towed with the wheels
rolling forward.
WARNING
The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads - not for recovering the car. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
1 Cover opening procedure may vary.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 133
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Start assistance
06
134
Starting with a donor battery
G 02
02 98
If for some reason the battery in your car is dis-
charged, you can "borrow" current from a
spare battery or another car's battery to start
the engine. Always check that the clamps are
fastened properly to prevent sparking during
the start attempt.
To avoid the risk of explosion, we recommend
you do exactly as follows.
1. Turn the ignition key to position 0.
2. Ensure that the other battery is 12 volt.
3. If the booster battery is in another car, stop
the engine of that car and make sure the
cars are not touching.
4. Connect the red cable between the
booster battery positive terminal (1+) and
the red connection in the engine compart-
ment (2+). Attach the clamp to the contact
point located beneath a small black cover
with a plus sign which is integrated in the
fuse box cover.
5. Connect one clamp of the black cable to
the negative terminal of the booster battery
(3).
6. Connect the other clamp of the black cable
to the lifting eye on the car's engine (4).
7. Start the engine of the "booster car". Let
the engine run a few minutes at a speed
slightly higher than idle, 1500 rpm.
8. Start the engine of the car with the flat bat-
tery.
Remove the clamps in reverse order.
NOTE
Do not remove the clamps during the start attempt (risk of spark build-up).
WARNING
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. One spark, which can be generated if you connect the jump leads incorrectly, is sufficient to make the battery explode.
The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns. If the acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes, seek medical atten- tion immediately.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 134
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Driving with a trailer
06
135
General
The car's towing bracket must be of an
approved type. Your Volvo dealer can advise
you as to which towing bracket to use.
Distribute the load on the trailer so that the weight on the towing bracket follows the specified maximum towball load.
Increase tyre pressure so that it corre- sponds to the pressure for full load. See the tyre pressure table!
Clean the towing bracket regularly and
grease the towball 1 and all moving parts to prevent unnecessary wear.
Do not drive with a heavy trailer when your car is brand new! Wait until it has driven at least 1000 km.
The brakes are loaded much more than usual on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your speed.
The engine and gearbox can overheat if the car is driven with a heavy load in hot weather. The temperature gauge in the combined instrument panel goes into the red zone when the car overheats. Stop and let the engine idle a few minutes.
If the car overheats, the air conditioning system can be temporarily switched off.
The gearbox reacts with a built-in protec- tion function if the car overheats. See the message in the display!
The engine is loaded more heavily than usual when driving with a trailer.
In the interests of safety, you should restrict speed to a maximum of 80 km/h, even if the laws of certain countries allow for higher speeds.
If you park with a trailer, apply the parking brake first, and then move the gear selector into position P (automatic gearbox) or select a gear (manual gearbox). If you park on a steep hill, put chocks under the wheels.
Avoid driving on inclines exceeding 12% if the trailer weight exceeds 1200 kg. Do not drive with a trailer at all on inclines exceed- ing 15%.
Trailer weights
For information on permitted trailer weights,
see page 259.
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailer weights are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle regulations can further limit trailer weights and speeds. Towbars can be certified for higher towing weights than the car can actually tow.
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be difficult to control in the event of sudden movement and braking.
Driving with trailer automatic gearbox
When parking on hills, apply the parking brake before moving the gear selector to P. When starting on a hill, first put the gear selector in drive and then release the park- ing brake.
Select a low gear in the gearbox when driv- ing on steep inclines or when driving slowly. This prevents the gearbox from upshifting if you have an automatic gear- box. The gearbox oil will be cooler.
If you have a Geartronic gearbox, do not use a higher manual gear than the engine
1 Does not apply to the ball if using a stabiliser hitch.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 135
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Driving with a trailer
06
136
can "handle". It is not always economical to drive in high gears.
NOTE
Some models require an oil cooler for the automatic gearbox when driving with a trailer. Check with your nearest Volvo dealer as to what applies to your car if you have a retrofitted towbar.
Levelling
If your car is equipped with automatic levelling,
the rear suspension always retains the correct
ride height regardless of load. When the car is
stationary, the rear suspension sinks. This is
completely normal. When starting with a load,
the level is pumped up after a certain distance.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 136
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Towing equipment*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 137
Towbar
If the car is equipped with a detachable towbar,
the towball mounting instructions must be fol-
lowed carefully, see page 139.
WARNING
If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable towbar:
Follow the assembly instructions for the towball section carefully.
The towball section must be locked with the key before setting off.
Check that the indicator window shows green.
Important checks
The towball section's towball must be cleaned and greased regularly.
NOTE
If a towball hitch with vibration damper is used, it is not necessary to grease the tow- ball.
Storing the towball section
G 03
11 20
Towball section storage location
IMPORTANT
Always remove the towball section after use and store it in the appointed location in the car, firmly fastened with its strap.
Trailer cable
G 01
45 89
An adapter is required if the car's towing
bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has
7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approved
by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag
on the ground.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 137
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Towing equipment*
06
138 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Specifications
G 02
66 82 G
02 67
01
G 02
67 02
Dimensions for mounting points (mm)
A B C D E F G
Fixed towbar standard 1058
83
1083 542 122 50
305 Fixed towbar with Nivomat 91
Detachable towbar standard 1069
94 316
Detachable towbar with Nivomat 100
1 Side member
2 Ball centre
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 138
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Detachable towbar*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 139
Fitting the towball
G 01
73 17
1. Remove the protective cover by first press-
ing in the catch and then pulling the
cover straight back .
G 02
03 01
2. Ensure that the mechanism is in the
unlocked position by turning the key clock-
wise.
G 02
03 02
3. Check that the indicator window (3) shows
red. If the window does not show red,
press in (1) and turn the locking wheel anti-
clockwise (2) until you hear a click.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 139
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Detachable towbar*
06
140 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G 02
03 04
4. Insert the towball section until you hear a
click.
G 02
03 06
5. Check that the indicator window shows
green.
G 02
03 07
6. Turn the key anticlockwise to locked posi-
tion. Remove the key from the lock.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 140
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Detachable towbar*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 141
G 02
03 09
7. Check that the towball section is secure by
pulling it up, down and back.
WARNING
If the towball section is not fitted correctly then it must be removed and refitted in accordance with the previous instructions.
IMPORTANT
Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch, the remainder of the towball section should be clean and dry.
G 02
03 10
8. Safety cable.
WARNING
The trailer's safety cable must be attached onto the attachment on the towbar.
Removing the towball
G 02
03 01
1. Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the
unlocked position.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 141
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Detachable towbar*
06
142 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G 02
03 12
2. Push in the locking wheel (1) and turn it
anticlockwise (2) until you hear a click.
G 02
03 14
3. Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it
comes to a stop. Hold it in this position
while pulling the towball rearward and
upward.
WARNING
Secure the towbar's loose towball safely if it is stored in the car, see page 137
G 01
73 18
4. Push on the protective cover.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 142
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Load on the roof
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 143
General
The load capacity is affected by extra acces-
sories mounted on the car, such as load carri-
ers, space box and towbar, as well as the load
on the towball. The load capacity of the car is
reduced by the number of passengers and their
weight. For information on permitted weights,
see page 259.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed.
Load carriers*
G 02
73 40
To avoid damaging your car and to achieve the
best level of safety when driving, we recom-
mend that you only use load carriers that Volvo
has specially designed for your car.
Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured. Lash the load securely with retaining straps.
Distribute the load evenly over the load carriers. Do not load lopsidedly. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom.
Remember that the car's centre of gravity and driving characteristics change if you have a load on the roof.
Keep in mind that the car's wind resistance and fuel consumption increase in propor- tion to the size of the load.
Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy braking and hard cornering.
Remove the load carrier when it is not in use. This reduces wind resistance and fuel consumption.
WARNING
Load no more than 100 kg on the roof, including the load carriers and any space box.
The car's centre of gravity and driving cha- racteristics are altered by roof loads.
Fitting load carriers
G 02
73 47
1. Make sure that the load carrier is fitted in
the right direction (see the marking on the
decal under the cover).
2. Fit the guide pins into the guide holes (1).
3. Carefully lower the bracket on the other
side to the roof.
4. Screw the knob up a bit.
5. Press the knob against the roof bracket
and catch the hook in the roof bracket
under the roof rail.
6. Screw the load carrier in place.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 143
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Load on the roof
06
144
7. Fit the guide pins of the other brackets into
the guide holes.
8. Screw the load carrier in place.
9. Check that the hook is properly secured in
the roof bracket.
10. Tighten the knobs alternately until the car-
rier feels secure.
11. Replace the cover.
12. Check that the roof rack is properly
secured.
NOTE
Check the knobs regularly to see that they are properly tightened.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 144
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Adjusting headlamp pattern
06
145
Correct light pattern for left or right- hand traffic
G 02
03 17
Headlamp pattern for left-hand traffic.
Headlamp pattern for right-hand traffic.
So as not to dazzle oncoming drivers, the
headlamp beam pattern can be altered by
masking the headlamps. The quality of the
beam pattern may not be as good.
Headlamp masking
Copy the templates and transfer the pattern to
a self-adhesive, waterproof material such as
opaque tape or the like.
The mask is positioned using the dot (5) in the
headlamp lens as a reference point. The refer-
ence measurement (X) indicates the distance
from the dot (5) to the corner of the mask,
marked with an arrow.
After copying the templates located on the next
page, check the measurements so that the ref-
erence measurements cover enough of the
beam pattern.
Adjusting headlamp pattern for Active Bi-
Xenon Lights ABL see page 52.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 145
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Adjusting headlamp pattern
06
146
Halogen headlamps
X X X X
3 41 2
G 02
85 59
Location of halogen headlamp masks, 1 and 2 = LHD variant, 3 and 4 = RHD variant
LHD variant
Copy templates 1 and 2. Check the measure-
ments to ensure they are correct. Transfer the
template to a self-adhesive, waterproof mate-
rial and cut it out.
Reference measurements Template 1: (3) = 70 mm, (4) = 40 mm.
Distance (X) to dot in headlamp lens (5): 13 mm.
Template 2: (6) = 55 mm, (7) = 40 mm.
Distance (X) to dot in headlamp lens (8): 18 mm.
RHD variant
Copy templates 3 and 4. Check the measure-
ments to ensure they are correct. Transfer the
template to a self-adhesive, waterproof mate-
rial and cut it out.
Reference measurements Template 3: (1) = 55 mm, (2) = 41 mm.
Distance (X) to dot in headlamp lens (5): 17 mm.
Template 4: (6) = 70 mm, (7) = 39 mm.
Distance (X) to dot in headlamp lens (8): 14 mm.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 146
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Adjusting headlamp pattern
06
147
G 02
85 63
Masking templates for halogen headlamps, LHD variant
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 147
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Adjusting headlamp pattern
06
148
G 02
85 64
Masking templates for halogen headlamps, RHD variant
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 148
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Adjusting headlamp pattern
06
149
Bi-Xenon headlamps
G 02
85 62
Location of Bi-Xenon headlamp masks, 1 and 2 = LHD variant, 3 and 4 = RHD variant
LHD variant
Copy templates 1 and 2. Check the measure-
ments to ensure they are correct. Transfer the
template to a self-adhesive, waterproof mate-
rial and cut it out.
Reference measurements Template 1: (3) = 56 mm, (4) = 43 mm.
Distance (X) to dot in headlamp lens (5): 29 mm.
Template 2: (6) = 56 mm, (7) = 42 mm.
Distance (X) to dot in headlamp lens (8): 6 mm.
RHD variant
Copy templates 3 and 4. Check the measure-
ments to ensure they are correct. Transfer the
template to a self-adhesive, waterproof mate-
rial and cut it out.
Reference measurements Template 3: (1) = 56 mm, (2) = 42 mm.
Distance (X) to dot in headlamp lens (5): 29 mm.
Template 4: (6) = 56 mm, (7) = 41 mm.
Distance (X) to dot in headlamp lens (8): 0 mm.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 149
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Adjusting headlamp pattern
06
150
G 02
85 63
Masking templates for Bi-Xenon headlamps, LHD variant
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 150
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Adjusting headlamp pattern
06
151
G 02
85 64
Masking templates for Bi-Xenon headlamps, RHD variant
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 151
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
BLIS (Blind Spot Information System)*
06
152 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G 02
02 95
Rearview mirror with BLIS system.
BLIS camera
Indicator lamp
BLIS symbol
BLIS is an information system which indicates
whether there is another vehicle moving in the
same direction in the so-called "blind spot".
WARNING
The system is a supplement to, not a replacement for, a safe driving style and use of the rearview mirrors. It can never replace the driver's attention and responsibility. The responsibility for changing lanes safely always rests with the driver.
A
B
G 02
02 96
Blind spots covered by BLIS Distance A = approx. 3 m Distance B = approx. 9,5 m
The system is designed to work most effec-
tively when driving in dense traffic on multi-lane
highways.
BLIS is based on digital camera technology.
The cameras (1) are located under the door
mirrors.
When a camera has detected a vehicle inside
the blind spot zone then an indicator lamp is lit
in the door panel (2). The light illuminates with
a constant glow to draw the driver's attention
to a vehicle in the blind spot.
NOTE
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car where the system has detected the vehicle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at the same time then both lamps illuminate.
BLIS also has an integrated function which
warns the driver if a fault should arise in the
system. If, for example, the system's cameras
are obscured then the BLIS indicator lamp
flashes and a message is shown in the instru-
ment panel display (table, see page 154). In
such cases, check and clean the lenses. If nec-
essary, the system can be switched off tem-
porarily by pressing the BLIS button (see
page 154).
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS system components must only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 152
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
BLIS (Blind Spot Information System)*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 153
When BLIS operates
The system operates when the car is driven at
a speed above 10 km/h.
When you overtake another vehicle The system reacts if you overtake another vehi-
cle at a speed of up to 10 km/h faster than the
other vehicle.
When you are overtaken by another
vehicle The system reacts if you are overtaken by a
vehicle travelling up to 70 km/h faster than you
are travelling.
WARNING
BLIS does not work in sharp bends.
BLIS does not work when the car is revers- ing.
A wide trailer coupled to the car can conceal other vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can pre- vent the vehicle in the screened area from being detected by BLIS.
System function in daylight and darkness
Daylight In daylight the system reacts to the shape of
the surrounding vehicles. The system is
designed to detect motor vehicles such as
cars, trucks, buses and motorcycles
Darkness In darkness the system reacts to the head-
lamps of surrounding vehicles. If its head-
lamps are not switched on then the system
does not detect the vehicle. This means for
example that the system does not react to a
trailer without headlamps which is towed
behind a car or truck.
WARNING
The system does not react to bicycles or mopeds.
The BLIS cameras can be disrupted by intensive light or when driving in the dark when there are no light sources (e.g. street lighting or other vehicles). The system may then interpret the lack of light as if the cam- eras have been blocked.
In both cases a message is shown on the display.
When driving in such conditions system performance may be temporarily reduced (see the information on the next page).
When the text message disappears the sys- tem returns to full functionality.
The BLIS cameras have the same limitations as the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in heavy snowfall or thick fog for example.
Cleaning
In order to work most effectively the BLIS cam-
era lenses must be clean. The lenses can be
cleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge.
Clean the lenses carefully so that they are not
scratched.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 153
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
BLIS (Blind Spot Information System)*
06
154 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
IMPORTANT
The lenses are electrically heated to melt ice or snow. If necessary, brush snow away from the lenses.
Switching off and reactivating BLIS
G 02
69 55
BLIS is activated automatically each time the ignition is switched on. The indicator lamps in the door panels flash three times when the ignition is switched on.
The system can be switched off by press- ing the BLIS button in the switch panel in the centre console (see illustration above). The lamp in the button goes out when the system is switched off and a text message
is shown in the display in the instrument panel.
BLIS can be reactivated by pressing the button. A lamp in the button then illumi- nates, a new text message is shown in the display and the indicator lamps in the door panels flash three times. Press the READ button, see page 47, to clear the text mes- sage.
BLIS system messages
Text on the dis- play
Specification
BLIND-SPOT INFO
SYSTEM ON
BLIS system on
BLIND-SPOT
SYST SERVICE
REQUIRED
BLIS not functioning
BLIND-SPOT
SYST R CAMERA
BLOCKED
Right-hand camera
blocked
BLIND-SPOT
SYST L CAMERA
BLOCKED
Left-hand camera
blocked
BLIND-SPOT
SYST CAMERAS
BLOCKED
Both cameras
blocked
Text on the dis- play
Specification
BLIS REDUCED
FUNCTION
The BLIS camera is
disrupted by fog or
strong sunlight shin-
ing directly into the
camera. The camera
resets itself when
the environment has
returned to normal.
BLIND-SPOT INFO
SYSTEM OFF
BLIS system off
The messages above are only shown if the
ignition key is in position II (or if the engine is
running) and BLIS is active (i.e. if the driver has
not switched off the system).
Limitations
In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp may
illuminate despite there being no other vehicle
within the blind spot.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 154
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
BLIS (Blind Spot Information System)*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 155
NOTE
If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on iso- lated occasions despite there being no other vehicle within the blind spot then this does not mean that a fault has arisen in the system.
In the event of a fault in the BLIS system the display shows the text BLIS Serv. required.
Here are several examples of situations where
the BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate even if
there is no other vehicle within the blind spot. G
01 81
76
Reflection from shiny wet road surface.
G 01
81 77
Own shadow on large, light, smooth surface, e.g. noise barrier or concrete road surface.
G 01
81 78
Low sun in the camera.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 155
evastarck
G 02
09 18
156 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General.................................................................................................. 158
Tyre pressure........................................................................................ 161
Warning triangle* and spare wheel....................................................... 163
Tyre pressure monitoring*..................................................................... 165
Changing wheels................................................................................... 167
Emergency puncture repair*................................................................. 169
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 156
evastarck
07 WHEELS AND TYRES
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 157
evastarck
07 Wheels and tyres
General
07
158
Driving characteristics and tyres
The tyres greatly affect the car's driving cha-
racteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre
pressure and speed rating are important for
how the car performs.
When changing tyres, ensure that tyres of the
same type and dimensions, and preferably also
the same make, are fitted to all four wheels.
Follow the recommended tyre pressures
specified on the tyre pressure label, see
page 161.
Designation of dimensions
The dimensions are stated on all car tyres.
Example of designation:
205/55R16 91 W.
205 Section width (mm)
55 Ratio between section height and
width (%)
R Radial ply
16 Rim diameter in inches (")
91 Tyre load index (in this case 615 kg)
W Speed rating for maximum permit-
ted speed (in this case 270 km/h).
Speed ratings
The car is approved as a whole, which means
that dimensions and speed ratings must not
differ from those specified on the vehicle reg-
istration document. The only exception to
these conditions is winter tyres (both those
with metal studs and those without). If such a
tyre is chosen, the car must not be driven faster
than the speed rating of the tyre (for example,
class Q can be driven at a maximum of
160 km/h).
Remember that traffic regulations determine
how fast a car can be driven, not the speed
class of the tyres.
Note! Maximum permitted speeds indicated.
Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)
T 190 km/h
H 210 km/h
V 240 km/h
W 270 km/h
Y 300 km/h
New tyres
Tyres are perishable. After a
few years they begin to
harden at the same time as
the friction capacity/charac-
teristics gradually deteriorate.
For this reason, aim to get as
fresh tyres as possible when
you replace them. This is especially important
with regard to winter tyres. The week and year
of manufacture, the tyre's DOT marking
(Department of Transportation), are stated with
four digits, for example 1502. The tyre in the
illustration was manufactured in week 15 of
2002.
Tyre age All tyres older than six years should be checked
by an expert even if they seem undamaged.
The reason for this is that tyres age and decom-
pose, even if they are hardly ever or never used.
The function can therefore be affected due to
the tyre's constituent materials being broken
down. In such a case the tyre should then not
be used. This also applies to spare tyres, winter
tyres and tyres saved for future use. Examples
of external signs which indicate that the tyre is
unsuitable for use are cracks or discoloration.
The age of the tyre can be determined by the
DOT marking, see illustration above.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 158
evastarck
07 Wheels and tyres
General
07
159
More even wear and maintenance
G 02
03 23
The correct tyre pressure results in more even
wear, see page 162. Driving style, tyre pres-
sure, climate and road condition affect how
quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid dif-
ferences in tread depth and to prevent wear
patterns arising, the front and rear wheels can
be switched with each other. A suitable dis-
tance for the first change is approx. 5000 km
and then at 10000 km intervals. Contact an
authorised Volvo workshop if you are uncertain
about tread depth.
Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging
up, and not standing up.
WARNING
A damaged tyre can lead to loss of control of the car.
Tyres with tread wear indicators Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless
bands across the width of the tread. On the
side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear
Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down
to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in height
with the tread wear indicators. Change to new
tyres as soon as possible. Remember that
tyres with little tread depth provide very poor
grip in rain and snow.
Winter tyres
Volvo recommends winter tyres with specific
winter tyre dimensions. Tyre dimensions are
dependent on engine variant. When driving on
winter tyres, they must be fitted to all four
wheels.
NOTE
Ask a Volvo dealer which rim and tyre types are most suitable.
Studded tyres Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for
500 1000 km so the studs settle properly into
the tyre. This gives the tyre, and especially the
studs, a longer service life.
NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studded tyres vary from country to country.
Tread depth Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem-
peratures place considerably higher demands
on tyres than summer conditions. It is therefore
recommended not to drive on winter tyres that
have a tread depth of less than four millimetres.
Snow chains Snow chains may only be used on the front
wheels. This also applies to all-wheel-drive
cars.
Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow
chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this
wears out both the snow chains and tyres.
Never use quick-fit snow chains as the space
between the brake discs and the wheels is too
small.
IMPORTANT
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva- lent chains designed for the car model, and tyre and rim dimensions. Consult an author- ised Volvo workshop
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 159
evastarck
07 Wheels and tyres
General
07
160
Locking wheel bolts Locking wheel bolts can be used on both alu-
minium and steel rims. If steel rims with locking
wheel bolts are used in combination with wheel
covers then the locking wheel bolts must be
fitted furthest from the air valve. Otherwise the
wheel cover cannot be fitted to the rim.
Summer and winter wheels
G 02
03 25
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation
When summer and winter wheels are changed
the wheels should be marked with which side
of the car they were mounted on, for example
L for left and R for right.
Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed
to only turn in one direction have the direction
of rotation marked with an arrow. The tyre must
always rotate in the same direction throughout
its lifespan.
Tyres should only be switched between front
and rear positions, never between left and
right-hand sides, or vice versa. If the tyre is
mounted incorrectly, the car's braking charac-
teristics and capacity to force rain, snow and
slush out of the way are adversely affected.
Tyres with the greatest tread depth should
always be fitted to the rear of the car (to
decrease the risk of skidding).
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if you
are uncertain about tread depth.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 160
evastarck
07 Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure
07
161
Recommended tyre pressure
G 02
07 91
The tyre pressure decal on the driver's side
door pillar (between frame and rear door)
shows which pressures the tyres should have
at different loads and speed conditions.
Stated on the decal:
Tyre pressures for the car's recommended wheel size
ECO pressure
Spare wheel pressure (Temporary Spare).
Checking the tyre pressure Check the tyre pressure regularly.
NOTE
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature. Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature.
Correct tyre pressures are specified in the tyre
pressure table see page 162. The specified
tyre pressures refer to "cold tyres". ("Cold
tyres" means the tyres are the same tempera-
ture as the ambient temperature.)
Even after several kilometres of driving, the
tyres warm up and the pressure increases. So
air must not be released if the pressure is
checked when the tyres are warm. While the
pressure must be increased if it is too low.
Inadequately inflated tyres increase fuel con-
sumption, shorten tyre lifespan and impair the
car's roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyre
pressure that is too low can also result in the
tyres overheating and disintegrating. For infor-
mation on the correct tyre pressure, refer to the
tyre pressure table.
Fuel economy, ECO pressure At speeds under 160 km/h, the general tyre
pressure for full load is recommended in order
to obtain optimum fuel economy.
Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort, road
noise and steering characteristics.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 161
evastarck
07 Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure
07
162
Tyre pressure table
Variant Tyre size Speed (km/h) Load, 1-3 persons Max. load
Front (kPa A) Rear (kPa) Front (kPa) Rear (kPa)
T5 205/55R16
215/55R16
225/45R17
235/40R18
0 160 220 220 260 260
160 + 260 260 280 280
0 160 260 B 260B 260B 260B
Others 195/65R15
205/55R16
215/55R16
225/45R17
235/40R18
0 160 220 220 260 260
160 + 250 250 280 280
0 160 260B 260B 260B 260B
Spare wheel,
Temp. spare
T125/80R17 0 80 420 420 420 420
A In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa (260 kPa = 2.60 bar) B ECO pressure, see page 161
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 162
evastarck
07 Wheels and tyres
Warning triangle* and spare wheel
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 163
Warning triangle
G 02
72 24
Follow the warning triangle regulations of the
country you are in.
Use the warning triangle as follows:
1. Turn both attachment screws to the verti-
cal position.
2. Carefully remove the warning triangle
case.
3. Remove the warning triangle from its
case (A).
4. Fold out the four support legs on the warn-
ing triangle.
5. Fold out both red sides of the warning tri-
angle. Place the warning triangle in a loca-
tion that is appropriate for the traffic
situation.
After use Pack everything in reverse order.
Make sure the warning triangle and its case are
properly secured in the boot lid.
Spare wheel, tools and jack
G 02
72 01
1. Spare wheel*
2. Mounting
3. Tool kit* with towing eye
4. Jack*
The spare wheel and jack and tool kit are
located under the floor of the cargo area.
Remove the spare wheel as follows:
1. Fold the rear edge of the floor mat forward.
2. Remove the jack and tool kit.
3. Unscrew the spare wheel and lift it out.
If the car is equipped with a carrier bag
holder: 1. Turn the two clips located at the rear corner
of the mat 90 degrees.
2. Pull the front of the floor mat back towards
the boot lid opening.
3. Lift the mat slightly and turn 90 degress to
lift it out.
4. Lift the mat out of the cargo area.
5. Unscrew the spare wheel and lift it out.
Return and secure everything in reverse order.
Make sure that the spare wheel is securely in
place and that the jack and tool kit are properly
secured.
Tools - returning into place The tools and jack* must be returned to their
correct places after use. The jack must be
cranked to the correct position, see the pre-
ceding illustration, in order to have space.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 163
evastarck
07 Wheels and tyres
Warning triangle* and spare wheel
07
164 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
IMPORTANT
Tools and jack must be stored in the intended location in the car's cargo area when not in use.
Spare wheel, "Temporary spare"*
The spare wheel "Temporary Spare" should
only be used for the short time it takes to repair
or replace the normal tyre.
By law, it is only legal to use the spare wheel/
tyre temporarily in connection with damage to
a tyre. A wheel/tyre of this type should be
replaced with a normal wheel/tyre as soon as
possible.
Remember also that this tyre combined with
the normal tyres will affect driving characteris-
tics. The maximum speed with the "Temporary
Spare" - spare wheel is therefore 80 km/h.
IMPORTANT
Only use the car's own genuine spare wheel! Tyres with other dimensions may cause damage to your car. Only one spare wheel may be used at a time.
First aid*
A case with first aid equipment is located in the
cargo area.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 164
evastarck
07 Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure monitoring*
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 165
General
The Tyre Pressure Monitoring System warns
the driver when the pressure is too low in one
or more of the car's tyres. It uses sensors
located inside the air valve in each wheel.
When the car is driven at about 40 km/h the
system detects the tyre pressure. If the pres-
sure is too low then a warning lamp on the
instrument panel illuminates and a message is
shown on the display.
Always check the system after changing a
wheel in order to ensure that replacement
wheels work with the system.
For information on correct tyre pressures, see
page 162.
The system does not replace normal tyre main-
tenance.
IMPORTANT
If a fault should arise in the tyre pressure system a warning lamp on the instrument panel will illuminate. The message TYRE PRESS. SYST SERVICE REQUIRED will be shown. This can be for various reasons, e.g. fitting a wheel not equipped with a sen- sor adapted for Volvo's tyre pressure moni- toring system.
Adjusting tyre pressure monitoring Tyre pressure monitoring can be adjusted in
order to follow Volvo's tyre pressure recom-
mendations, when driving with a heavy load for
example.
NOTE
The engine must not be running.
1. Inflate the tyres to the required pressure.
2. Select key position I or II.
3. Turn the thumbwheel on the left-hand stalk
switch until the text TYRE PRESSURE
CALIBRATION is shown on the display.
4. Press and hold the RESET button until the
text TYRE PRESSURE CALIBRATED is
shown in the display.
Rectifying low tyre pressure When the message LOW TYRE PRESS.
CHECK TYRES is shown on the display:
1. Check the tyre pressure in all four tyres.
2. Inflate the tyre(s) to the correct pressure.
3. Drive the car for at least 1 minute in total at
a minimum of 40 km/h and check that the
message disappears.
Deactivating tyre pressure monitoring
NOTE
The engine must not be running.
1. Key position I or II.
2. Turn the thumbwheel on the left-hand stalk
switch until the text TYRE PRESS. SYST
ON is shown on the display.
3. Press and hold the RESET button until the
text TYRE PRESS. SYST OFF is shown.
To reactivate the system, repeat the same
steps 1-3, so that TYRE PRESS. SYST ON is
shown.
Recommendations Only factory fitted wheels are equipped with
TPMS sensors in the valves.
The temporary spare wheel does not have this sensor.
If wheels without TPMS sensors are used then TYRE PRESS SYST SERVICE REQUIRED will be shown in the display every time the car is driven faster than 40 km/h for more than 10 minutes.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 165
evastarck
07 Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure monitoring*
07
166 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors are fitted to all wheels on the car (summer and winter wheels).
Volvo recommends that sensors are not moved between different wheels.
WARNING
When inflating a tyre equipped with TPMS, hold the nozzle of the pump directly against the valve to avoid damaging the valve.
Driveable punctured tyres*
If Self Supporting run flat Tyres (SST) have
been selected then the car is also equipped
with TPMS.
This type of tyre has a specially reinforced side
wall that makes continued driving possible
despite the tyre losing some air. These tyres
are fitted on a special rim. (Normal tyres can
also be fitted to this rim).
If an SST tyre loses tyre pressure then the yel-
low TPMS lamp on the instrument panel illu-
minates and a message is shown in the text
panel. If this occurs, reduce speed to max.
80 km/h. The tyre must be replaced as soon as
possible.
Drive carefully, in some cases it can be difficult
to see which tyre is faulty. In order to establish
which tyre needs attention, check all four tyres.
WARNING
SST tyres should only be fitted by individu- als with expertise on SST tyres.
SST tyres must only be fitted together with TPMS.
After a fault message on low tyre pressure has been shown, do not drive faster than 80 km/h.
Maximum driving distance to tyre change is 80 km.
Avoid hard driving.
SST tyres must be replaced if they are dam- aged or punctured.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 166
evastarck
07 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 167
Removing wheels
G 02
03 31
Remember to set out the warning triangle if you
must change a wheel in a trafficked area. The
spare wheel* is under the plastic trough in the
cargo area.
1. Apply the parking brake and engage 1st
gear on cars with manual gearbox posi-
tion P on cars with automatic gearbox.
WARNING
Check that the jack is not damaged, that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt.
2. Place chocks in front of and behind the
wheels which will remain on the ground.
Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones.
G 02
03 32
3. Cars with steel rims have removable wheel
covers. Prize off the wheel cover with the
end of the wheel wrench*, or pull it off by
hand.
4. Loosen the wheel nuts -1 turn anticlock-
wise with the wheel wrench.
G 02
73 24
WARNING
Never position anything between the ground and the jack, nor between the jack- ing point and the jack.
5. There are two jacking points on each side
of the car. There is a recess in the plastic
cover at each point. Crank the foot of the
jack* down so it is pressed squarely on the
ground. Check that the jack sits in the
anchorage as illustrated and that the foot
is positioned vertically under the anchor-
age.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 167
evastarck
07 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
07
168
6. Lift the car so that the wheel is free.
Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the
wheel.
Fitting the wheel
G 02
73 10
1. Clean the contract surfaces on the wheel
and hub.
2. Put on the wheel. Screw in the wheel bolts.
3. Lower the car so that the wheel cannot
rotate.
4. Tighten the wheel nuts crosswise. It is
important that the wheel nuts are tightened
properly. Tighten to 140 Nm. Check the
torque with a torque wrench.
5. Put on the wheel cover (steel rim).
G 02
73 09
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised on the jack.
Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack.
Ensure that passengers wait with the car - or preferably a crash barrier - between them and the road.
IMPORTANT
If TPMS is specified then the tyres must be calibrated after fitting, see see page 165.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 168
evastarck
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 169
General
The emergency puncture repair kit is used to
seal a puncture as well as to check and adjust
the tyre pressure. It consists of a compressor
and a bottle with sealing fluid. The kit works as
a temporary repair. The sealing fluid bottle
must be replaced before its expiration date and
after use.
The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punc-
tured in the tread.
NOTE
The emergency puncture repair kit is only intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in the tread.
NOTE
The jack is an option on cars equipped with emergency puncture repair kit.
The emergency puncture repair kit has limited
capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in
the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency
puncture repair kit if they have larger slits,
cracks or similar damage.
12 V sockets for connecting the compressor
are located by the centre console in the front,
by the rear seat and in the cargo area. Choose
the electrical socket that is nearest the punc-
tured tyre.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Contact an authorised Volvo work- shop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maxi- mum driving distance is 200 km). The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.
Taking out the emergency puncture
repair kit The emergency puncture repair kit, with com-
pressor and tools, is located under the floor in
the cargo area.
1. Fold away the rear edge of the floor mat,
forward from the back.
2. Lift up the emergency puncture repair kit.
Overview
G 02
04 00
Label, maximum permitted speed
Switch
Cable
Bottle holder (orange cap)
Protective cap
Pressure reducing valve
Air hose
Sealing fluid bottle
Pressure gauge
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 169
evastarck
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
07
170 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Sealing punctured tyres
G 01
97 23
For information on the function of the parts, see preceding illustration.
1. Open the lid of the emergency puncture
repair kit.
2. Detach the decal for maximum permitted
speed and affix it to the steering wheel.
WARNING
The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the case of contact with skin, wash away the fluid with soap and water.
3. Check that the switch is in position 0 and
locate the cable and the air hose.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle seal. The seal is bro- ken when the bottle is screwed in.
4. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the
bottle's stopper.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
5. Screw the bottle into its holder.
6. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
in the air hose valve connection to the bot-
tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.
7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and
start the car.
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the com- pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness arise then the compressor must be switched off immediately. The journey should not be continued. Contact an authorised tyre centre.
NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure drops after approximately 30seconds.
8. Flick the switch to position I.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.
9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey should not be continued. Contact an authorised tyre centre.
10. Switch off the compressor to check the
pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 170
evastarck
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 171
pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum is
3.5 bar.
11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the
cable from the 12 V socket.
12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit
the valve cap.
13. As soon as possible, drive approximately 3
km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so that
the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.
Rechecking the repair and pressure 1. Reconnect the equipment.
2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure
gauge.
3. If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is insuf-
ficiently sealed. The journey should not be
continued. Contact a tyre centre.
4. If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar,
the tyre must be inflated to the pressure
specified on the tyre pressure decal.
Release air using the pressure reducing
valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
5. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and cable. Refit the dust cap.
NOTE
The sealing fluid bottle and hose must be replaced after use. Replacement must be performed by an authorised Volvo work- shop.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
6. Return the emergency puncture repair kit
to the cargo area.
7. Drive to the nearest authorised Volvo work-
shop for the replacement/repair of the
damaged tyre. Advise the workshop that
the tyre contains sealing fluid.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Contact an authorised Volvo work- shop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maxi- mum driving distance is 200 km). The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.
Inflating the tyres
The car's original tyres can be inflated by the
compressor.
1. The compressor must be switched off.
Make sure that the switch is in position 0
and locate the cable and air hose.
2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
in the air hose valve connection to the bot-
tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes can result in danger to life. Never leave the engine run- ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf- ficient ventilation.
3. Connect the cable to one of the car's 12 V
sockets and start the car.
4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch
to position I.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 171
evastarck
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
07
172 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.
5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on
the tyre pressure decal. (Release air using
the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pres-
sure is too high.)
6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and cable.
7. Refit the dust cap.
Changing the sealing fluid canister
Replace the bottle when the expiration date
has passed. Treat the old bottle as environ-
mentally hazardous waste.
WARNING
The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural rubber-latex.
Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic reaction in the event of skin contact.
Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
Store out of the reach of children.
NOTE
Leave the container at a collection point for storing dangerous waste.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 172
evastarck
07 Wheels and tyres
07
173
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 173
evastarck
G 02
09 20
174
Cleaning................................................................................................ 176
Touching up paintwork......................................................................... 179
Rustproofing......................................................................................... 180
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 174
evastarck
08 CAR CARE
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 175
evastarck
08 Car care
Cleaning
08
176
Washing the car
Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty. Use
car shampoo. Dirt and road salt can lead to
corrosion.
Do not park the car in direct sunlight. Washing a car with hot paintwork can cause permanent paintwork damage. Wash the car in a car wash with waste water separator.
Thoroughly rinse dirt off the underbody of the car.
IMPORTANT
Rinse the entire car to remove loose dirt. When using a pressure washer: Make sure that the nozzle of the pressure washer is not closer than 30 cm to the bodywork. Do not spray directly onto the locks.
Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and plenty of lukewarm water.
If the dirt is difficult to dislodge, wash the car using a cold degreasing agent.
Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a water scraper.
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.
IMPORTANT
Dirty headlamps have impaired functional- ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for example.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is a natural phenomenon, all outside lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp when it has been switched on for a time.
Cleaning the wiper blades Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades,
as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen,
impair the service life of wiper blades.
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windscreen reg- ularly with lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo.
Do not use any strong solvents.
Removing bird droppings Wash away bird droppings from the paintwork
as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain
chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork
very quickly. This discoloration can only be
removed by a specialist.
Chromed wheels
IMPORTANT
Rim cleaning agents can cause stains on chrome-plated wheels. Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and plenty of luke- warm water.
Automatic car washes An automatic car wash is a simple and quick
way of washing the car, but it can never replace
a proper handwashing. The brushes of an auto-
matic car wash cannot reach everywhere.
IMPORTANT
Washing by hand is gentler to the paintwork than an automatic car wash. Paintwork is also more sensitive when it is new. For this reason, handwashing is recommended dur- ing the first few months with a new car.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 176
evastarck
08 Car care
Cleaning
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 177
Testing the brakes
WARNING
Always test the brakes after washing the car, including the parking brake, to ensure that moisture and corrosion do not attack the brake linings and reduce braking per- formance.
Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then
when driving long distances in rain or slush.
This heats and dries the brake pads. Do the
same thing after starting in very damp or cold
weather.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
dealers is recommended for cleaning coloured
plastic parts, rubber and trim components
(such as glossy trim mouldings). When using
such a cleaning agent the instructions must be
followed carefully.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used.
Polishing and waxing
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull
or to give the paintwork extra protection.
The car does not need to be polished until it is
at least one year old. However, the car can be
waxed before this time. Do not polish or wax
the car in direct sunlight.
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you
begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt
and tar stains using Volvo tar remover or white
spirit. More stubborn stains can be removed
using fine rubbing paste designed for car paint-
work.
Polish first with a polish and then wax with liq-
uid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the
packaging carefully. Many preparations con-
tain both polish and wax.
IMPORTANT
Paint treatment such as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or similar could damage the paintwork. Paintwork damage caused by such treatment is not covered by Volvo warranty.
Cleaning door mirrors and front door windows with water-repellent coating*
Never use products such as car wax,
degreaser or similar on mirror/glass surfaces
as this could ruin their water-repellent proper-
ties.
Take care when cleaning so as not to damage
the glass surface.
To avoid damaging glass surfaces when
removing ice only use plastic ice scrapers.
There is natural wear of the water-repellent
coating.
NOTE
Treatment with a special finishing agent available from Volvo dealers is recom- mended in order to maintain the water- repellent properties. This should be used first after three years and then each year.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 177
evastarck
08 Car care
Cleaning
08
178
Cleaning the interior
Treating stains on fabric upholstery A special cleaning agent, available from Volvo
dealers, is recommended for cleaning the fab-
ric upholstery. Other chemicals can impair the
fire retardant qualities of the upholstery.
IMPORTANT
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the fabric upholstery.
Treating stains on leather upholstery Volvo leather upholstery is chromium-free and
approved in accordance with the Oeko-
Tex 100 standard.
The leather is refined and processed so that it
retains its natural characteristics. It is given a
protective coating, but regular cleaning is
required in order to maintain both characteris-
tics and appearance. Volvo offers a compre-
hensive product for the cleaning and treatment
of leather upholstery which, when used in
accordance with the instructions, preserves
the leather's protective coating.
After a period of use the natural appearance of
the leather will nevertheless emerge, depend-
ing more or less on the surface texture of the
leather. This is a natural maturing of the leather
and shows that it is a natural product.
To achieve best results Volvo recommends
cleaning and application of the protective
cream once to four times per year (or more if
required). Ask a Volvo dealer about Volvo's
Leather care product.
IMPORTANT
Never use strong solvents. Such products may damage fabric, vinyl and leather upholstery.
IMPORTANT
Note that materials with colour that runs when dry (new jeans, suede garments etc.) may discolour the upholstery material.
Washing instructions for leather
upholstery 1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened
sponge and squeeze out a strong foam.
2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular
movements.
3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the
stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the
stain. Do not rub.
4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and
allow the leather to dry completely.
Protective treatment of leather
upholstery 1. Pour a small amount of the protective
cream on the felted cloth and massage in
a thin layer of cream with gentle circular
movements on the leather.
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes
before use.
The leather has now been given improved pro-
tection against stains and improved UV pro-
tection.
Treating stains on interior plastic, metal
and wood parts A special cleaning agent, available from Volvo
dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior
parts and surfaces. Do not scrape or rub stains.
Never use strong stain removers.
Cleaning seatbelts Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special
textile cleaning agent is available from your
Volvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is dry
before allowing it to retract.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 178
evastarck
08 Car care
Touching up paintwork
08
179
Paintwork
Paint is an important part of the car's rust-
proofing and should therefore be checked reg-
ularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged
paintwork should be rectified immediately. The
most common types of paintwork damage are
stone chips, scratches, and stains on the
edges of wings and doors.
Colour code
G 02
03 46
Data plate.
It is important that the correct colour is used.
The colour code number (1) is shown on the
data plate, see page 256.
Stone chips and scratches
G 02
03 45
Before touching up paintwork, the car must be
clean and dry and at a temperature above
15 C.
Materials
Primer in a can
Paint in a can or touch-up pen
Brush
Masking tape.
Minor stone chips and scratches If the stone chip has not penetrated to the bare
metal and there is an undamaged colour coat,
you can paint straight after cleaning the dam-
aged area.
If the stone chip has penetrated to the
bare metal 1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the
damaged surface. Then remove the tape to
remove any loose paint.
2. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine
brush or a matchstick. Apply paint using a
brush once the primer is dry.
3. For scratches, proceed as above, but
mask around the damaged area to protect
the undamaged paintwork.
4. After a few days, polish the touched-up
areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount
of lapping paste.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 179
evastarck
08 Car care
Rustproofing
08
180
Inspection and maintenance
Your car has already received a thorough and
complete rustproofing at the factory. Parts of
the body are made of galvanised sheet metal.
The underbody is protected by a wear-resis-
tant anti-corrosion compound. A thin, pene-
trating rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the
members, cavities and closed sections.
Maintain the car's rustproofing.
Keep the car clean. Hose down the under- body. If using a pressure washer, keep the nozzle at least 30 cm from the painted sur- faces.
Regularly check and touch-up the rust- proofing treatment as necessary.
The car's rustproofing does not normally
require treatment for approximately 12 years.
After this period, it should be treated at three-
year intervals. If the car needs further treat-
ment, please contact an authorised Volvo
workshop.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 180
evastarck
08 Car care
08
181
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 181
evastarck
G 02
09 22
182
Volvo service......................................................................................... 184
Self-maintenance.................................................................................. 185
Bonnet and engine compartment......................................................... 186
Diesel.................................................................................................... 188
Oils and fluids....................................................................................... 189
Wiper blades......................................................................................... 193
Battery................................................................................................... 194
Replacing bulbs.................................................................................... 196
Fuses..................................................................................................... 203
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 182
evastarck
09 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 183
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Volvo service09
184
Volvo service programme
Before the car left the factory, it was thoroughly
test driven. It was checked again in accord-
ance with Volvo Car Corporation regulations
before it was handed over to you.
To keep your Volvo as safe and reliable as pos-
sible, follow the Volvo service programme
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Have an authorised Volvo workshop carry out
service and maintenance work. Volvo work-
shops have the personnel, special tools and
service literature to guarantee the highest qual-
ity of service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Special service measures
Certain service measures which affect the car's
electrical system can only be performed using
electronic equipment specially developed for
your car. For this reason, always contact an
authorised Volvo workshop before beginning
or performing service work that affects the
electrical system.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 184
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Self-maintenance 09
185
Before starting work on the car
Battery Check that the battery cables are correctly
connected and tightened.
Never disconnect the battery when the engine
is running (e.g. if replacing the battery).
Never use a quick charger to charge the bat-
tery. The battery cables must be disconnected
when charging the battery.
The battery contains acid that is both corrosive
and toxic. It is therefore important to handle the
battery in an environmentally correct manner.
Let your Volvo dealer assist you.
WARNING
The car ignition system has very high volt- age!
The voltage in the ignition system is dan- gerous!
Do not touch spark plugs, ignition cables or the ignition coil when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on!
The ignition should be switched off when:
conducting engine tests
replacing parts in the ignition system, such as spark plugs, ignition coil, dis- tributor, ignition cables, etc.
Lifting the car
G 02
72 52
If the car is lifted with a workshop jack, it should
sit with the front edge on the engine support
arm. Do not damage the splashguard under the
engine. Ensure that the jack is positioned so
that the car cannot slide off the jack. Always
use axle stands or the like.
If you lift the car using a two pillar workshop lift,
ensure that the front and rear lift arms are fixed
under the lifting points on the door sill. See
previous illustration.
Check regularly
Check the following at regular intervals, for
example, when refuelling:
Coolant The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks on the expansion tank.
Engine oil The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.
Power steering fluid The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.
Washer fluid The reservoir should be well filled. Use washer antifreeze at tempera- tures around freezing.
Brake and clutch fluid The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.
WARNING
Bear in mind that the radiator fan may start automatically some time after the engine has been switched off.
Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 185
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Bonnet and engine compartment09
186
Opening the bonnet
G 02
72 53
Opening the bonnet, left-hand drive car.
G 02
72 54
Opening the bonnet, right-hand drive car.
To open the bonnet:
1. Pull the handle on the far left under the
dashboard. You will hear when the catch
releases.
2. Insert your hand under the centre of the
front edge of the bonnet and press the
safety catch to the right.
3. Open the bonnet.
WARNING
Check that the bonnet locks properly when closed.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 186
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Bonnet and engine compartment 09
187
Engine compartment 1
G 02
72 75
Expansion tank, cooling system
Power steering fluid reservoir
Washer fluid reservoir
Engine oil dipstick
Radiator
Radiator fan
Engine oil filler pipe
a) Clutch/brake fluid reservoir (left-hand
drive car). b) Clutch/brake fluid reservoir
(right-hand drive car)
Relay/fuse box
Air filter. (The cover has a different design
depending on engine variant.)
Battery (in cargo area)
1 The appearance of the engine compartment may vary slightly due to engine variant. However, the components listed are in the same positions.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 187
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Diesel09
188
Fuel system
Diesel must fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204
standards. Diesel engines are sensitive to con-
taminants such as high volumes of sulphur
particles for example. Only use diesel fuel from
a well-known producers. Never use diesel of
dubious quality.
At low temperatures (-40 C to -6 C), a paraffin
precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which
can lead to ignition problems. The major oil
companies produce a special winter-grade
diesel for temperatures around freezing. This
fuel is less viscous at low temperatures and
reduces the risk of paraffin precipitate.
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is
reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When
refuelling, check that the area around the fuel
filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the
paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter-
gent and water.
IMPORTANT
Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European diesel standard, see page 268.
IMPORTANT
Diesel type fuels which must not be used: special additives, Marine Diesel Fuel, fuel oil, RME 1 (Rape Methyl Ester) and vegeta- ble oil. These fuels do not fulfil the require- ments in accordance with Volvo recommen- dations and generate increased wear and engine damage that is not covered by the Volvo warranty.
IMPORTANT
For model year 2006 or later the sulphur content must be a maximum of 50 ppm.
Empty tank No special procedures are required if the tank
runs dry. The fuel system is bled automatically
if the ignition switch is kept in position II for
approx. 60 seconds before the start attempt.
Draining condensation from the fuel filter The fuel filter separates condensation from the
fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine opera-
tion.
The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet
or if you suspect that the car has been filled
with contaminated fuel.
IMPORTANT
Certain special additives remove the water separation in the fuel filter.
1 Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of RME, but further amounts must not be added.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 188
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids 09
189
Engine compartment decal for oil grade.
G 02
16 28
IMPORTANT
Always use oil of the prescribed grade, see the engine compartment decal.
The engine will be damaged if lower grade oil is used or if the car is driven with the oil level too low.
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
Using oil of a higher than specified grade is
permitted. If the car is driven in adverse con-
ditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a
higher grade than that specified on the decal,
see page 262.
Adverse driving conditions Check the oil level more frequently for long
journeys:
towing a caravan or trailer.
in mountainous regions.
in temperatures colder than -30 C or hot- ter than +40 C
shorter driving distances (shorter than 10 km) at low temperatures (under 5 C).
This may result in abnormally high oil tempera-
ture or oil consumption.
Checking and changing the engine oil
and oil filter Change the oil and oil filter in accordance with
the intervals specified in the Service and War-
ranty Booklet.
IMPORTANT
When filling oil to top up a low oil level, the oil being filled must be of the same grade and viscosity as the oil in the engine.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter- vals can be applied.
Only use a prescribed grade of oil (see the engine compartment decal) for both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, starting characteris- tics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war- ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo uses different systems for warning of low
oil level or low oil pressure. Certain variants
have an oil pressure sensor, and then the lamp
for oil pressure is used. Other variants have an
oil level sensor, and then the driver is informed
via the warning symbol in the centre of the
instrument unit as well as by display texts.
Certain models have both variants. Contact an
authorised Volvo dealer for more information.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 189
evastarck
Check the oil level frequently and change
at high speeds.
the oil regularly.
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids09
190
Checking the oil level in a new car is especially
important before the first scheduled oil change.
The Service and Warranty Booklet specifies the
odometer readings for oil changes.
Volvo recommends checking the oil level every
2 500 km. The most accurate measurements
are made on a cold engine before starting. The
measurement will be inaccurate if taken imme-
diately after the engine is switched off. The
dipstick will indicate that the level is too low
because the oil has not had time to flow down
into the oil sump.
Checking the oil
G 02
03 36
The oil level must be within the area marked on the dipstick
Checking the oil in a cold engine 1. Wipe the dipstick clean before checking
the level.
2. Check the oil level using the dipstick. The
level must be between the MIN and MAX
marks.
If the level is close to the MIN mark, start by
topping up with 0.5 litres. Top up until the oil
level is nearer the MAX than the MIN mark on
the dipstick, see page 262 and forward for
capacities.
Checking the oil in a warm engine 1. Park the car on a level surface, switch off
the engine and wait 10 15 minutes to
allow the oil time to run back to the sump.
2. Wipe the dipstick clean before checking
the level.
3. Check the oil level using the dipstick. The
level must be between the MIN and MAX
marks.
If the level is close to the MIN mark, start by
topping up with 0.5 litres. Top up until the oil
level is nearer the MAX than the MIN mark on
the dipstick, see page 262 and forward for
capacities.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.
IMPORTANT
Never fill above the MAX mark. Oil con- sumption may increase if too much oil is poured into the engine.
Washer fluid reservoir
G 02
72 43
Washer fluid reservoir
The windscreen and headlamp washers share
a common reservoir. See the capacities and
recommended fluid grade on page 264.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 190
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids 09
191
Use washer fluid during the winter so that the
fluid does not freeze in the pump, reservoir and
hoses.
Tip: Clean the wiper blades when topping up
washer fluid. Mix the washer antifreeze and
water before filling the reservoir.
Coolant
G 02
72 76
Coolant reservoir.
Check the coolant regularly. The level must lie
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
expansion tank. Top up the coolant when the
level falls to the MIN mark.
See capacities and recommended grade for
fluids and oils on page 264.
When topping up the coolant, follow the
instructions on the packaging. It is important
that the mixture of coolant concentrate and
water is correct for the prevailing weather con-
ditions. Never top up with water only. The risk
of freezing increases with both too little and too
much coolant concentrate.
WARNING
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant requires topping up when the engine is at operating temperature, unscrew the expan- sion tank cap slowly to gently release the overpressure.
IMPORTANT
A high content of chlorine, chlorides and other salts may cause corrosion in the cooling system.
Always use coolant with anti-corrosion agent as recommended by Volvo.
Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50% water and 50% coolant.
Mix the coolant with approved quality tap water. In the event of any doubt about water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in accordance with Volvo rec- ommendations.
When changing coolant/replacing cool- ing system components, flush the cool- ing system clean with approved quality tap water or flush with ready-mixed coolant.
The engine must only be run with a well- filled cooling system. High tempera- tures can occur, causing a risk of damage (cracks) to the cylinder head.
For capacities and for standards regarding
water quality, see the table under Fluids and
lubricants on page 264.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 191
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids09
192
Clutch and brake fluid reservoir
G 02
73 06
Location dependent on whether car is left or right- hand drive.
Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser-
voir 1. The fluid level must be between the
MIN and MAX marks. Check the level regularly.
Change the brake fluid every other year or at
every other regular service.
See capacities and recommended grade for
fluids and oils on page 264.
WARNING
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.
NOTE
The fluid should be changed annually on cars driven in conditions requiring hard, fre- quent braking, such as driving in mountains or tropical climates with high humidity.
Power steering fluid reservoir
ADD FULL
G 02
72 00
Check the level frequently. The fluid does not
require changing. The level must be between
the ADD and FULL marks.
See capacities and recommended grade for
fluids and oils on page 264.
NOTE
It is possible to steer if a fault should occur in the power steering system or if the car loses electrical power and requires towing. Bear in mind that steering will be more dif- ficult than normal and more force will be required to turn the steering wheel.
1 Location dependent on whether car is left or right-hand drive.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 192
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Wiper blades 09
193
Wiper blades
NOTE
Bear in mind that the wiper blade on the driver's side is longer than the one on the passenger side.
Cleaning For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see
page 176.
IMPORTANT
Check the wiper blades regularly. Neglected maintenance shortens the serv- ice life of the wiper blades.
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
1. Fold out the wiper arm and grasp the wiper
blade.
2. Press in the ribbed spring catch on the
wiper blade while lifting it off at the arm
extension.
3. Fit the new blade in reverse order and
check that it is properly secured.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 193
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Battery09
194
Battery care
The service life and function of the battery is
influenced by factors such as the number of
starts, discharging, driving style, driving con-
ditions and climatic conditions.
NOTE
An expended battery must be recycled in an environmentally correct manner as it con- tains lead.
WARNING
Batteries can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. One spark, which can be generated if you connect the jump leads incorrectly, is sufficient to make the battery explode.
The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns. If the acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes, seek medical atten- tion immediately.
NOTE
The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly
Symbols on the battery
Use protective goggles
Further information in the
owner's manual.
Store the battery out of the
reach of children.
The battery contains corro-
sive acid.
Avoid sparks and naked
flames.
Risk of explosion.
Changing the battery
G 02
84 19
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 194
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Battery 09
195
Removing the battery 1. Switch off the ignition and remove the key.
2. Wait at least 5 minutes before touching any
electrical terminals. This allows time for the
information in the car's electrical system to
be stored in the control modules.
3. Undo the screws from the lock brace over
the battery and remove the brace.
4. Bend up the plastic cover over the bat-
tery's negative terminal or unscrew the
cover from the battery.
5. Disconnect the negative battery lead.
6. Detach the lower console holding the bat-
tery.
7. Undo the positive cable, and if there is a
plastic cover, after turning the plastic cover
aside.
8. Undo the evacuation hose.
9. Remove the battery.
Fitting the battery 1. Fit the battery into position.
2. Position the lower console and screw it in
place.
3. Connect the positive cable, press in, and if
there is a plastic cover, turn it down.
4. Connect the negative cable, and if there is
a plastic cover, turn it down.
5. Fit the plastic cover or the cover over the
battery.
6. Make sure the evacuation hose is correctly
connected to both the battery and the out-
let in the bodywork.
7. Fit the lock brace over the battery and
tighten the screws.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 195
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs09
196
General
All bulb specifications are given on page 270.
The following list contains bulbs and point-
source lamps that are specialised or unsuitable
for changing except at a workshop:
Active Bi-Xenon and Bi-Xenon lamp
General interior lighting in the roof.
Reading lamps
Glovebox lighting
Direction indicators in the door mirrors.
Approach lighting in the door mirrors.
High-level brake light.
LED lights in rear lamp cluster.
WARNING
On cars with Bi-Xenon and Active Bi- Xenon headlamps, Xenon lamp replace- ment must be carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop. The headlamps must be handled with extreme care due to the Xenon lamp's high-voltage unit.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with your fingers. Grease and oil from your fin- gers are vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage.
Changing front bulbs
G 02
72 78
All front bulbs (except for fog lamps) are
changed by first removing the lamp housing
from the engine compartment.
NOTE
If you experience difficulty when replacing a bulb then we recommend that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Location of the bulbs in the headlamp
G 02
84 33
Side marker lamp
Direction indicator
Dipped beam lamp, position lamp (halogen
and Bi-Xenon )
Main beam bulb, position lamp (active Bi-
Xenon )
On certain variants, a white plastic sleeve may
impede bulb replacement. This can be broken
off and discarded.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 196
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs 09
197
Dipped beam, halogen
G 02
84 35
To remove the bulb 1. Switch off all lights and turn the ignition key
to position 0.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Unplug the connector.
4. Disconnect the spring clamp. First push to
the right so that the spring clamp discon-
nects, then out and down.
5. Pull out and remove the bulb.
G 02
84 36
To fit 1. Fit the new bulb. In can only be positioned
one way.
2. Press the clamp spring upwards and a little
to the left so that it secures in its catch.
3. Plug in the connector.
4. Refit the cover.
Main beam
G 02
84 37
To remove the bulb 1. Switch off all lights and turn the ignition key
to position 0.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Turn the bulb anticlockwise and pull it out.
4. Undo the connector by pressing the catch
out and then pulling.
To fit 1. Plug the connector into the bulb, a click is
heard.
2. Refit the bulb, turn it in position.
3. Refit the cover.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 197
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs09
198
Position/parking lamps
G 02
27 33
Halogen and Bi-Xenon headlamps.
To remove the bulb 1. Switch off all lights and turn the ignition key
to position 0.
2. Remove the cover (same cover as for
dipped beam).
3. Pull out the lamp.
4. Unplug the connector.
To fit 1. Fit the new bulb.
2. Plug in the connector.
3. Refit the cover. G
02 71
71
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps.
To remove the bulb 1. Switch off all lights and turn the ignition key
to position 0.
2. Remove the cover where the main beam is
also located.
3. Pull out the lamp.
4. Unplug the connector.
To fit 1. Fit the new bulb.
2. Plug in the connector.
3. Refit the cover.
Direction indicator, left-hand side
G 02
84 38
To remove the bulb 1. Switch off all lights and turn the ignition key
to position 0.
2. Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and
remove it.
3. Press the bulb inwards, turn it anticlock-
wise and remove it from the bulb holder.
To fit 1. Fit the new bulb by pressing it in and turn-
ing it clockwise.
2. Refit the bulb holder in the lamp housing
and turn it clockwise.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 198
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs 09
199
Direction indicator, right-hand side
G 02
72 83
1. Switch off all lights and turn the ignition key
to position 0.
2. Remove the radiator hose (1) from the radi-
ator.
3. Remove the screw (2) to the filler pipe.
4. Pull the pipe (3) straight up.
5. Remove the ventilation hose (4) from the
pipe.
6. Replace the bulb.
7. Check that the washer fluid reservoir gas-
ket between the filler pipe and the holder is
properly secured.
8. Put the filler pipe (3) back into place.
9. Refit the ventilation hose onto the filler pipe
(4).
10. Screw in the screw (2) to the filler pipe and
refit the radiator hose to the radiator (1).
Side marker lamps
G 02
84 39
1. Turn the bulb holder clockwise and pull it
out.
2. Replace the bulb.
3. Refit the bulb holder by turning it anticlock-
wise.
Front fog lamps
To remove the bulb
G 02
72 27
1. Switch off all lights and turn the ignition key
to position 0.
2. Turn the bulb holder slightly anticlockwise.
3. Pull out and remove the bulb.
To fit 1. Fit the new bulb. In can only be positioned
one way.
2. Refit the bulb holder, turn it clockwise
slightly. The "TOP" mark must be upward.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 199
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs09
200
Cargo area
G 02
84 41
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that
the lamp housing comes loose.
2. Remove the bulb.
3. Fit a new bulb.
4. Refit the lamp housing.
Number plate lighting
G 02
84 42
1. Switch off all lights and turn the ignition key
to position 0.
2. Remove the screw with a screwdriver.
3. Loosen the whole lamp housing carefully
and pull it out. Turn the contact anticlock-
wise and pull out the bulb.
4. Fit the new bulb.
5. Plug in the connector and turn it clockwise
in the lamp housing.
6. Refit the entire lamp housing and screw it
into place.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 200
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs 09
201
Rear light cluster
3501204m
G 02
72 77
Location of bulbs Brake light
Position/parking lamps
Rear fog lamp (one side)
Side marker lamps
Direction indicators
Reversing lamp
Removing All bulbs in the rear lamp cluster can be
replaced from inside the cargo area.
Bulb specifications can be found on page
270.
1. Switch off all lights and turn the ignition key
to position 0.
2. Unlock and fold down the side panel to
access the bulbs.
The bulbs are located in two separate bulb
holders, an upper and a lower. Each bulb
holder has a locking pin.
To replace the bulb 1. Detach the connector from the bulb holder.
2. Press the catches together and pull out the
holder.
3. Remove the bulb
4. Fit the new bulb in the holder.
5. Plug in the connector.
6. Close and secure the side panel.
NOTE
If the message BULB FAILURE/CHECK STOP LAMP remains after a faulty bulb has been replaced then an authorised Volvo workshop must be consulted.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 201
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs09
202
Courtesy lighting
G 02
72 87
There is courtesy lighting under the instrument
panel on the driver and passenger sides.
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that
the lamp housing comes loose.
2. Remove the bulb.
3. Fit a new bulb.
4. Refit the lamp housing.
Vanity mirror lighting
G 02
84 43
Vanity mirror*, different versions.
1. Insert a screwdriver and turn so that the
lamp lens releases.
2. Remove the bulb.
3. Fit a new bulb.
4. First press the bottom of the lamp glass
back into place above the four hooks. Then
press the top in place.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 202
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
203
General
G 02
71 79
Cable routing may vary slightly due to engine variant. However, the components listed are in the same positions.
All electrical functions and components are
fused to protect your car's electrical system
from damage by short circuiting and overload-
ing.
Fuses are housed in four different locations in
the car:
Relay/fuse box in the engine compartment.
Fuse box in the passenger compartment
within the sound barrier on the driver's
side.
Fuse box in the passenger compartment at
dashboard end on driver's side.
Fuse box in cargo area.
Changing If an electrical component or function does not
work, this may be because the component's
fuse was temporarily overloaded and blew.
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side
to see whether the curved wire has blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse
of the same colour and amperage.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object, or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause signifi- cant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire.
There are a number of spare fuses in the cover
on the end face of the dashboard. There are
also pliers which facilitate the removal and fit-
ting of fuses. If the same fuse blows repeatedly,
there is a fault in the component, and you
should contact an authorised Volvo workshop
to have it checked.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 203
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses09
204 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Relay/fuse box in the engine compartment
G 02
69 72
Press in the plastic catches on the short sides of the box and pull the cover upward.
1. ABS 30 A
2. ABS 30 A
3. High-pressure washer,
headlamps 35 A
4. Parking heater* 25 A
5. Auxiliary lamps* 20 A
6. Starter motor relay 35 A
7. Windscreen wipers 25 A
8. Fuel pump 15 A
9. Transmission control
module (TCM), diesel 15 A
10. Ignition coils (petrol),
engine control module
(ECM), injection valves
(diesel) 20 A
11. Accelerator pedal sensor
(APM), AC compressor,
fan electronics box 10 A
12. Engine control module
(ECM) (petrol), injection
valves (petrol), mass air
flow sensor (petrol) 15 A
mass air flow sensor (die-
sel) 5 A
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 204
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
205
13. Electronic throttle mod-
ule (ETM), (petrol) 10 A
Electronic throttle mod-
ule (ETM), air mixing
valve, fuel pressure reg-
ulator, solenoid valve,
(diesel) 15 A
14. Lambda-sond (petrol) 20 A
Lambda-sond (diesel) 10 A
15. Crankcase ventilation
heater, solenoid valves
(petrol) 10 A
solenoid valves, glow
plugs (diesel) 15 A
16. Dipped beam, left 20 A
17. Dipped beam, right 20 A
18. - -
19. Engine control module
(ECM) supply, engine
relay 5 A
20. Position lamps 15 A
21. Vacuum pump 20 A
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 205
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses09
206 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Fuses in the passenger compartment at instrument panel end face on driver's side
22
24
23
21
29
27
28
26
25
9
8
7
19
18
17
16
4
5
6
3
2
13
14
15
12
11
38
36
37
33
34
35
31
32
201 10 30
G 03
23 40
A decal which specifies the positions and amperages of the fuses is located in the end box cover.
1. Power driver's seat* 25 A
2. Power passenger seat* 25 A
3. Climate control system
fan 30 A
4. Control module, right
front door 25 A
5. Control module, left front
door 25 A
6. General lighting, ceiling
(RCM) Upper electronic
module (UEM) 10 A
7. Sunroof* 15 A
8. Ignition switch, SRS sys-
tem, engine control mod-
ule (ECM), deactivating
SRS passenger side,
(PACOS), electronic
immobiliser (IMMO),
transmission control
module (TCM), diesel, 7.5 A
9. OBDII, light switch (LSM),
Steering Angle Sensor
(SAS), Steering Wheel
Module (SWM) 5 A
10. Audio 20 A
11. Amplifier* 30 A
12. RTI display* 10 A
13. Phone* 5 A
14. - 38 -
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 206
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 207
Fuses in the passenger compartment within the sound barrier on the driver's side
G 02
84 12
1. Seat heating, right side 15 A
2. Seat heating, left side 15 A
3. Horn 15 A
4. - -
5. - -
6. Reserve -
7. Reserve -
8. Siren* 5 A
9. Brake lamp switch feed 5 A
10. Combined instrument
panel (DIM), climate con-
trol (CCM), parking
heater, power driver's
seat 10 A
11. Front and rear seat socket 15 A
12. - -
13. Reserve -
14. - -
15. ABS, STC/DSTC 5 A
16. Electronic power steering
(ECPS), Active Bi-
Xenon (HCM), headlamp
levelling 10 A
17. Fog lamp, front left 7.5 A
18. Fog lamp, front right 7.5 A
19. Reserve -
20. Reserve -
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 207
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses09
208 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
21. Transmission Control
Module (TCM), reverse
gear inhibitor (M66) 10 A
22. Main beam, left 10 A
23. Main beam, right 10 A
24. - -
25. - -
26. Reserve -
27. Reserve -
28. Power passenger seat*,
audio 5 A
29. Fuel pump 7.5 A
30. BLIS* 5 A
31. Reserve -
32. Reserve -
33. Vacuum pump 20 A
34. - -
35. - -
36. - -
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 208
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 209
Fuses in the cargo area
G 02
69 68
1. Reversing lamp 10 A
2. Position lamps, fog lamps,
cargo area lighting, num-
ber plate lighting, lamps in
brake lighting 20 A
3. Accessories (AEM)* 15 A
4. Reserve -
5. REM electronics 10 A
6. CD changer, TV, RTI* 7.5 A
7. Towing bracket wiring*
(30-feed) 15 A
8. Cargo area socket 15 A
9. Rear right door: Power
window, power window
lock 20 A
10. Rear left door: Power win-
dow, power window lock 20 A
11. Reserve -
12. Reserve -
13. Diesel filter heater 15 A
14. - -
15. Reserve -
16. Reserve -
17. Audio accessories* 5 A
18. Reserve -
19. Foldable head restraint* 15 A
20. Towing bracket wiring*
(15-feed) 20 A
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 209
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses09
210 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
21. Reserve -
22. - -
23. AWD 7.5 A
24. Four-C SUM* 15 A
25. - -
26. Park Assist* 5 A
27. Main fuse: Towing bracket
wiring, Four-C, Parking
assistance, AWD 30 A
28. Central locking system
(PCL) 15 A
29. Trailer lighting, left: Posi-
tion lamps, direction indi-
cator* 25 A
30. Trailer lighting, right: Brake
lamp, rear fog lamp, direc-
tion indicator* 25 A
31. Main fuse: Fuse 37, 38 40 A
32. - -
33. - -
34. - -
35. - -
36. - -
37. Heated rear window 20 A
38. Heated rear window 20 A
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 210
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
09
211
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 211
evastarck
G 02
09 24
212 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Overview HU-450.................................................................................. 214
Overview HU-650.................................................................................. 215
Overview HU-850.................................................................................. 216
Audio functions HU-450/650/850......................................................... 217
Audio functions HU-450........................................................................ 219
Audio functions HU-650/850................................................................ 220
Radio functions HU-450/650/850......................................................... 222
Radio functions HU-450....................................................................... 224
Radio functions HU-650/850................................................................ 225
Radio functions HU-450/650/850......................................................... 226
Cassette player HU-450........................................................................ 231
CD player HU-650................................................................................. 233
Internal CD changer HU-850................................................................. 234
External CD changer HU-450/650/850*................................................ 235
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II HU-850.................................................... 236
Technical data....................................................................................... 238
Phone functions*................................................................................... 239
Call options........................................................................................... 242
Memory functions................................................................................. 245
Menu functions..................................................................................... 247
Miscellaneous information.................................................................... 252
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 212
evastarck
10 INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 213
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Overview HU-450
10
214 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
HU-450
21 3 76 84 5
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 G
02 55
97
TAPE Shortcuts
FM Shortcut between FM1, FM2, FM3
AM Shortcut between AM1, AM2
AUTO Automatic station preset
Display
SCAN Automatic station search
Navigation buttons CD/radio seek/
change station or track, cassette/CD Fast
forward/rewind/select next/previous track
EXIT Scroll back in the menu
BASS Press out and turn TREBLE
Press out, pull and turn
POWER (On/Off) Press VOLUME Turn
REV - Cassette - Tape direction selector -
CD changer* - Random
Cassette opening
PRESET/CD PUSH MENU Stored radio
stations CD changer*
Cassette eject
SOURCE PUSH MENU Opens main
menu Press Turn to select: Radio (FM/
AM), Cassette, CD changer*
FADER Press out and turn BAL Press
out, pull and turn
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 214
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Overview HU-650
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 215
HU-650
COMPACT
DIGITAL AUDIO
1
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 653 4
16 17 1813 14 15 G
02 55
98
RND CD random
AM Shortcut between AM1, AM2
CD slot
Display
SCAN Automatic station search
CD eject
FM Shortcut between FM1, FM2, FM3
CD Shortcuts
AUTO Automatic station preset
Navigation buttons seek/change station
or track
EXIT Scroll back in the menu
1-6 Station setting buttons/selecting CD
changer position
POWER (On/Off) Press VOLUME Turn
BASS Press out and turn
TREBLE Press out and turn
BALANCE Press out and turn
FADER Press out and turn
SOURCE PUSH MENU Opens the main
menu: Press and turn to select: Radio FM
or AM, CD or CD changer*
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 215
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Overview HU-850
10
216 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
HU-850
COMPACT
DIGITAL AUDIO
9
10
11
12
13
14
87
16 17 1815 20 2119
1 2 653 4
G 02
55 99
RND CD random
AM Shortcut between AM1, AM2
CD slot
Display
3-CH 3-channel stereo
OFF 2-channel stereo
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II
CD eject
FM Shortcut between FM1, FM2, FM3
CD - CD player
AUTO Automatic station preset
Navigation buttons seek/change station
or track
EXIT Scroll back in the menu
SCAN Automatic station search
POWER (On/Off) Press VOLUME Turn
1-6 Station setting buttons/selecting CD
changer position
BASS Press out and turn
TREBLE Press out and turn
BALANCE Press out and turn
FADER Press out and turn
SOURCE PUSH MENU Opens the main
menu: Press and turn to select: Radio FM
or AM, CD or CD changer*
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 216
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions HU-450/650/850
10
217
On/Off switch
Press the knob to turn on or
switch off the radio.
Volume control
Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume.
The volume control is electronic and has no
end position. If you have a steering wheel key-
pad, increase or decrease volume with (+) or
() buttons.
Low battery voltage
If battery voltage is low, a text appears in the
combined instrument unit display. The energy
economy function of the car may switch off the
radio. Charge the battery by starting the
engine.
Volume control TP/PTY/NEWS
If a cassette or CD is playing when the radio
receives a traffic bulletin, news or selected pro-
gramme type, the function is interrupted and
the bulletin or message is broadcast with the
volume selected for traffic information, news or
programme type.
When the bulletin or message is finished, the
unit immediately returns to the previously set
volume and resumes playing the cassette or
CD.
The audio system can be equipped with differ-
ent options and different versions. There are
three audio system versions:
Performance
High Performance
Premium Sound.
FM and AM radio with RDS and CD player is
however included in each version.
AUX
G 02
66 78
Input for external audio source (AUX) 3.5 mm
The AUX input can be used for connecting an
MP3 player for example.
Sometimes the AUX external audio source can
be heard at a different volume to the internal
audio sources, e.g. the CD player. If the audio
volume of the external audio source is too high
then the sound quality can be impaired. Pre-
vent this by adjusting the input volume of the
AUX input.
Volume control AUX 1. Press SOURCE, turn to ADVANCED
MENU and select by pressing SOURCE.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 217
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions HU-450/650/850
10
218
2. Press SOURCE, turn to AUDIO
SETTINGS and select by pressing
SOURCE.
3. Press SOURCE, turn to AUX INPUT
LEVEL and select by pressing SOURCE.
In this mode the volume can be adjusted by
turning SOURCE.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 218
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions HU-450
10
219
Optimum sound reproduction
The audio system is calibrated for optimum
sound reproduction by means of digital signal
processing.
This calibration takes into account loudspeak-
ers, amplifiers, passenger compartment
acoustics, listener position etc. for each com-
bination of car model and audio system.
There is a also a dynamic calibration that takes
into account the level set for the volume con-
trol, radio reception and vehicle speed.
The controls that are explained in these oper-
ating instructions, e.g. Bass, Treble and Equal-
izer, are only intended for the user to be able to
adapt the sound reproduction according to
personal taste.
Bass
Adjust the bass by pressing
out the knob and turning it to
the left or right.
The bass is "normalised" in
the centre position. Press the
knob back into its original
position after adjustment.
Treble
Adjust the treble by pressing
the knob, pulling it out farther
and turning it to the left or
right. The treble is "normal-
ised" in the centre position.
Press the knob back into its
original position after adjust-
ment.
Fader Balance front/rear
Set a suitable balance
between the front and rear
speakers by pressing the
knob and turning it right (more
sound from front pair) or left
(more sound from rear pair).
The balance is "normalised"
in the centre position. Press the knob back into
its original position after adjustment.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 219
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions HU-650/850
10
220 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Balance right/left
Adjust the balance by press-
ing, pulling out the knob and
turning it to the left or right.
The balance is "normalised"
in the centre position. Press
the knob back into its original
position after adjustment.
Selecting the audio source
There are two ways to select
audio source:
Either with the shortcut keys
AM, FM, TAPE or with the
SOURCE knob. Turn the
SOURCE knob to select
between radio settings (FM1, FM2, FM3 and
AM1, AM2). If a cassette player or CD
changer* is connected, it can also be selected
with the knob.
Press the AM and FM button
repeatedly to toggle between
FM1, FM2, FM3 and AM1, AM2.
The selected audio source is
shown in the display.
Bass
G 02
71 91
Adjust the bass by pressing out the knob and
turning it to the left or right.
The bass is "normalised" in the centre position.
Press the knob back into its original position
after adjustment.
Treble
Adjust the treble by pressing out the knob and
turning it to the left or right. The treble is "nor-
malised" in the centre position. Press the knob
back into its original position after adjustment.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 220
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions HU-650/850
10
221
Balance right/left
Adjust balance by pressing the knob and turn-
ing it left or right. The balance is "normalised"
in the centre position. Press the knob back into
its original position after adjustment.
Fader Balance front/rear
Set a suitable balance between the front and
rear speakers by pressing the knob and turning
it right (more sound from front pair) or left (more
sound from rear pair). The balance is "normal-
ised" in the centre position. Press the knob
back into its original position after adjustment.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 221
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions HU-450/650/850
10
222 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Selecting the audio source
There are two ways to select
audio source:
Either with the shortcut keys
AM, FM, TAPE or with the
SOURCE knob.
Turn the SOURCE knob to select between
radio settings (FM1, FM2, FM3 and AM1, AM2).
If a cassette player 1 or CD changer* is con-
nected, it can also be selected with the knob.
Press the AM - and FM button
repeatedly to toggle between
FM1, FM2, FM3 and AM1, AM2.
The selected audio source is
shown in the display.
Scanning
Press the SCAN button to start
the search. When the radio
finds a station, it stops there for
about 10 seconds and then
continues its search. To listen
to the station, press the SCAN
or EXIT button.
Tuning
Press or to seek lower or
higher frequencies. The radio searches for the
next audible station and then stops. Press the
button again to continue the search.
Manual tuning
Press and hold or . MAN is
shown in the display. The radio slowly scrolls
in the desired direction, increasing its tempo
after a few seconds. Release the button when
the desired frequency shows in the display.
The frequency can then be adjusted by briefly
pressing one of the arrow keys or
. Manual adjustment mode stays in
effect five seconds after the last press.
Steering wheel keypad
If you have a keypad in the steering wheel,
press the right or left arrow to select preset
stations.
G 02
70 04
NOTE
If the car is equipped with an integrated phone, the steering wheel keypad cannot be used for radio functions while the phone is in active mode. Phone information is shown continuously in the display when the phone is activated.
1 HU-450
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 222
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions HU-450/650/850
10
223
Switch off the phone by pressing . If
there is no SIM card in the phone, switch it off,
see page 241.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 223
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions HU-450
10
224
Programming stations
1. Set the desired frequency.
2. Briefly press the PRESET/CD knob.
3. Select a number by turning forward or
back.
Press again to store the desired frequency and
station.
Preset To select a preset radio pro-
gramme, turn the PRESET/CD
knob to the stored number. The
preset programme is shown in
the display.
Autostoring stations This function automatically
seeks and stores up to 10
strong AM or FM stations in a
separate memory. The function
is especially useful in areas in
which you are unfamiliar with
the radio stations or their frequencies.
1. Select radio mode using the FM or AM
button.
2. Start the search by pressing and holding
AUTO (more than 2 seconds).
3. AUTO is shown in the display and a num-
ber of strong stations (max. 10) from the set
frequency band are saved in the autostore
memory. If there are no stations with suffi-
cient signal strength, NO STATION is dis-
played.
4. Briefly press the AUTO button or one of the
arrows of the steering wheel keypad to
scroll to another of the automatically preset
stations.
AUTO is shown in the display when the radio
is in Autostore mode. The text disappears
when you return to normal Radio mode.
Returning to normal Radio mode Press FM, AM or EXIT or turn the
PRESET/CD knob.
Returning to Autostore mode Briefly press AUTO.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 224
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions HU-650/850
10
225
Storing stations
G 02
71 89
To store stations on the preset buttons 1 - 6:
1. Set the desired station.
2. Press and hold the required station storage
button. The sound mutes a few seconds.
Station STORED is shown in the display.
Up to 6 stations each can be stored under
AM1, AM2, FM1, FM2 and FM3, a total of
30 stations.
Autostoring stations
AUTO automatically seeks and
stores up to 10 strong AM or
FM stations in a separate mem-
ory. If more than ten stations
are found, the ten strongest are
selected. The function is espe-
cially useful in areas where the radio stations
and their frequencies are unfamiliar.
Select radio mode using the AM or FM
button.
Start the search by pressing and holding
AUTO (more than 2 seconds).
AUTO is shown in the display and a number of
strong stations (max. 10) from the set fre-
quency band are saved in the autostore mem-
ory. If there are no stations with sufficient signal
strength, NO STATION is displayed.
Briefly press the AUTO button or one of the
arrows of the steering wheel keypad to
scroll to another of the automatically preset
stations.
AUTO is shown in the display when the radio
is in Autostore mode. The text disappears
when you return to normal Radio mode.
Returning to normal Radio mode Press the FM, AM or EXIT button.
Returning to Autostore mode Briefly press AUTO.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 225
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions HU-450/650/850
10
226
Radio Data System RDS
RDS is a system that links together specific
network transmitters. It is used, for example, to
tune the correct frequency of a station irre-
spective of the transmitter or the active audio
source (e.g. CD). The system can also be used
for receiving traffic information and for finding
broadcasts of a specific type. Radio text is also
a component of RDS. A radio station can, for
example, transmit information about the radio
programme currently being broadcast.
Some radio stations do not use RDS or only
use a limited range of its features.
PI seek (automatic search for stations)
When listening to an RDS transmitter, various
information, such as traffic information, is
stored in the radio.
When a preset RDS transmitter is later
selected, the radio updates the transmitter's
RDS information. If the radio is at the boundary
or just outside of the transmitter's range, the
radio automatically seeks the strongest possi-
ble transmitter of that channel.
If there is no audible transmitter, the radio qui-
ets and the PI SEEK appears in the display
until the station is found.
Traffic information TP Station
Traffic information from RDS stations inter-
rupts other audio sources. The message is
heard at the volume set for this specific feature.
As soon as the message ends, the radio returns
to the previous audio source and volume set-
ting.
Activating traffic information 1. Select radio mode using the FM button and
press SOURCE.
2. Select TP and press SOURCE.
3. Turn SOURCE, select TP ON (flashing
text) and press SOURCE.
4. Press EXIT.
Deactivate TP 1. Select radio mode using the FM button and
press SOURCE.
2. Select TP and press SOURCE.
3. Turn SOURCE, select TP OFF (flashing
text) and press SOURCE.
4. Press EXIT.
TP is shown in the display when this function
is active.
Press EXIT if you do not wish to listen to a traf-
fic bulletin. However, the TP function remains
active and the radio waits for the next traffic
bulletin.
Activate traffic information from a
special channel 1. Select radio mode using the FM button.
2. Activate the station from which traffic infor-
mation is to be received.
3. Press SOURCE.
4. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED
MENU and press SOURCE.
5. Turn SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS and press SOURCE.
6. Turn SOURCE, select TP STATION and
press SOURCE.
7. Turn SOURCE, select SET CURRENT and press SOURCE.
8. Press EXIT.
Deactivating TP Station 1. Select radio mode using the FM button and
press SOURCE.
2. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED
MENU and press SOURCE.
3. Turn SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS and press SOURCE.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 226
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions HU-450/650/850
10
227
4. Turn SOURCE, select TP STATION and
press SOURCE.
5. Turn SOURCE, select TP STATION OFF and press SOURCE.
6. Press EXIT.
Alarm Alarm! is shown in the radio display when an
alarm message is broadcast. This function is
used to warn motorists of major accidents and
catastrophes, such as a bridge collapse or an
accident at a nuclear plant.
TP search This function allows you to listen to traffic infor-
mation when travelling between different areas
and countries without selecting a station.
1. Select radio mode using the FM button and
press SOURCE.
2. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED
MENU and press SOURCE.
3. Turn SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS and press SOURCE.
4. Turn SOURCE, select TP SEARCH and
press SOURCE.
5. Turn SOURCE, select TP SEARCH ON or
TP SEARCH OFF (flashing text) and press
SOURCE.
6. Press EXIT.
News
Messages with a programme code (such as
news from RDS stations) will interrupt other
audio sources at the volume set for this specific
feature. As soon as the news broadcast is fin-
ished, the audio system returns to the previous
audio source and volume setting. As soon as
the news broadcast is finished, the audio sys-
tem returns to the previous audio source and
resumes the previous volume setting.
Activating News 1. Select radio mode using the FM button and
press SOURCE.
2. Turn SOURCE, select NEWS and press
SOURCE.
3. Turn SOURCE, select NEWS ON (flashing
text) and press SOURCE.
4. Press EXIT.
NEWS appears on the display.
Deactivating News 1. Select radio mode using the FM button and
press SOURCE.
2. Turn SOURCE, select NEWS and press
SOURCE.
3. Turn SOURCE, select NEWS OFF (flash-
ing text) and press SOURCE.
4. Press EXIT.
NEWS disappears from the display.
Press EXIT if you do not wish to listen to a news
broadcast. However, the News function
remains active and the radio waits for the next
news programme.
Interruptions for news from the current
station 1. Select radio mode using the FM button.
2. Activate the station from which traffic infor-
mation is to be received.
3. Press SOURCE.
4. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED
MENU and press SOURCE.
5. Turn SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS and press SOURCE.
6. Turn SOURCE, select NEWS STATION and press SOURCE.
7. Turn SOURCE, select SET CURRENT and press SOURCE.
8. Press EXIT.
Deactivating News Station 1. Select radio mode using the FM button and
press SOURCE.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 227
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions HU-450/650/850
10
228
2. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED
MENU and press SOURCE.
3. Turn SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS and press SOURCE.
4. Turn SOURCE, select NEWS STATION and press SOURCE.
5. Turn SOURCE, select NEWS STN OFF and press SOURCE.
6. Press EXIT.
Programme type PTY
Use the PTY function to select between the
various programme types.
1. Select radio mode using the FM button and
press SOURCE.
2. Turn SOURCE, select PTY and press
SOURCE.
3. Turn SOURCE, select PTY in the menu
and press SOURCE.
The radio begins seeking the selected pro-
gramme type.
If you do not wish to listen to the station found
by the radio, continue the search using the left
or right arrow key.
If the radio does not find a station with the
selected programme type, it returns to the pre-
vious frequency.
Not all radio stations have a PTY designation.
Programme type Display shows
OFF PTY OFF
Current affairs Current
Religion Spiritual
Country music Country
Documentary Document
Finance Finance
Folk music Folk music
Leisure and hobby Leisure
Children's progs Children's progs
Oldies music "Oldies"
Information Info
Jazz music Jazz
Serious classic Classical
Culture and Art Culture
Programme type Display shows
Light classic L Class
Easy listening Easy listening
National music Nation M
News News
Pop music Pop
Travel and holiday Travel
Rock music Rock
Social affairs Social
Sport Sport
Drama Drama
Phone In Phone
Entertainment Enterta
Education Educ
Science Science
Weather & Metro Weather & Metro
Other music Other M
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 228
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions HU-450/650/850
10
229
PTY standby PTY mode is then in standby until the selected
programme type is broadcast. At which time
the radio automatically switches to the station
sending the selected programme type.
Deactivating 1. Select radio mode using the FM button and
press SOURCE.
2. Turn SOURCE, select PTY press
SOURCE.
3. Turn SOURCE, select PTY OFF press
SOURCE.
4. Press EXIT. The symbol PTY goes out and
the radio returns to normal mode.
PTY language Select the language for the radio display (Eng-
lish, German, French or Swedish).
1. Select radio mode using the FM button and
press SOURCE.
2. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED
MENU and press SOURCE.
3. Turn SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS and press SOURCE.
4. Turn SOURCE, select PTY LANGUAGE and press SOURCE.
5. Turn SOURCE, select language and press
SOURCE.
6. Press EXIT.
Automatic frequency updating
The AF function is normally activate and
ensures that the radio tunes to the strongest
available transmitter for a radio station.
Activating AF 1. Select radio mode using the FM button and
press SOURCE.
2. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED
MENU and press SOURCE.
3. Turn SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS
MENU and press SOURCE.
4. Turn SOURCE, select AF ON (flashing
text) and press SOURCE.
5. Press EXIT.
Deactivating AF 1. Select radio mode using the FM button and
press SOURCE.
2. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED
MENU and press SOURCE.
3. Turn SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS
MENU and press SOURCE.
4. Turn SOURCE, select AF OFF (flashing
text) and press SOURCE.
5. Press EXIT.
Regional radio programmes
The regional function is normally deactivated.
When the function is activated you can con-
tinue to listen to a regional broadcasts even if
the signal is weak.
Activating REG 1. Select radio mode using the FM button and
press SOURCE.
2. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED
MENU and press SOURCE.
3. Turn SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS
MENU and press SOURCE.
4. Turn SOURCE, select REG ON (flashing
text) and press SOURCE.
5. Press EXIT.
Deactivating REG
Select radio mode using the FM button and press SOURCE.
Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED MENU and press SOURCE.
Turn SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS MENU and press SOURCE.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 229
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions HU-450/650/850
10
230
Turn SOURCE, select REG OFF (flashing text) and press SOURCE.
Press EXIT.
EON Local/Distant (Enhanced Other Networks)
When EON is activated, the radio programme
is interrupted for traffic bulletins, news broad-
casts or the like from other channels.
The function has two levels Local only interrupts if the signal is strong.
Distant also interrupts with weaker signals.
1. Select radio mode using the FM button and
press SOURCE.
2. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED
MENU and press SOURCE.
3. Turn SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS
MENU and press SOURCE.
4. Turn SOURCE, select EON (flashing text)
and press SOURCE.
5. Turn SOURCE, select Local or Distant and press SOURCE.
6. Press EXIT.
Resetting RDS functions Resets all radio settings to the original factory
settings.
1. Select radio mode using the FM button and
press SOURCE.
2. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED
MENU and press SOURCE.
3. Turn SOURCE, select RESET TO
DEFAULT and press SOURCE.
4. Press EXIT.
ASC (Active Sound Control)
The ASC function automatically adapts the
volume of the radio to vehicle speed.
Activating ASC: 1. Select radio mode using the FM button and
press SOURCE.
2. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED
MENU and press SOURCE.
3. Turn SOURCE, select AUDIO SETTINGS
MENU and press SOURCE.
4. Turn SOURCE, select ASC LEVEL and
press SOURCE.
5. Turn SOURCE, select LOW, MEDIUM,
HIGH or Off and press SOURCE.
Radio text
Some RDS stations transmit information on
programme content, artists, etc.
Hold the FM button depressed a few seconds
to access any transmitted radio text, which
then appears in the display.
After the text is shown twice, the radio once
again displays the station/frequency.
A brief press on EXIT ends the radio text dis-
play.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 230
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Cassette player HU-450
10
231
Cassette opening
DOLBY B NR
G 02
72 46
Insert the cassette in the slot with the wider
part to the right. TAPE Side A appears in the
display.
When one side is finished, the cassette player
automatically plays back the other side (auto
reverse).
To play a cassette that is already in the cas-
sette player, turn the SOURCE knob or press
the TAPE shortcut key.
Changing tape direction
Press the REV button in order to play the other
side of the cassette; the side being played will
be shown in the display.
Cassette eject
If you press the button, the tape
stops and the cassette is ejec-
ted. Turn the SOURCE knob to
select a new programme
source. The cassette can be
inserted or ejected even if the
system is switched off.
Dolby B Noise Reduction
This is a preset function which can be switched
off as follows: press and hold the REV button
until the Dolby symbol disappears from the
display. Press the same button again in order
to reactivate the Dolby function.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under
license of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Cor-
poration. Dolby and the double D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licens-
ing Corporation.
Scanning
Scan (SCAN) plays the first
ten seconds of each track.
Press the SCAN or EXIT button
when you find a track you wish
to listen to.
Fast forward/reverse
The tape is fast forwarded by pressing and
holding and is rewound with .
" FF" (fast forward) or " REW" (rewind) is
shown in the display during this time. Press the
button again to stop fast forwarding/rewinding.
G 02
70 04
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 231
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Cassette player HU-450
10
232
Next track Previous track
Pressing automatically fast forwards
the tape to the next track.
Pressing automatically rewinds the
tape to the previous track. For this function to
be operational, there must be a five second
pause between tracks.
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad, the arrows can also be used.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 232
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
CD player HU-650
10
233
CD player
Insert a CD. If there is already a CD in the
player, activate it by turning the SOURCE knob
or pressing the CD shortcut key.
CD eject
If you press the button shown in
the illustration, the CD player
stops playing and the disc is
ejected.
NOTE
For reasons of traffic safety, you have twelve seconds to handle the ejected disc. Otherwise, the CD is drawn back into the player and resumes with the most recently played track.
Fast forward/reverse and change track
Press and hold down the right
or left-hand arrow key to fast
forward/reverse a track or the
whole disc. Fast forward/
reversing cannot be done using
the steering wheel keypad.
Briefly press the left or right-hand arrow key to
go to the previous or next track. The steering
wheel keypad can also be used for this. Track
numbers are shown in the display.
Scanning
Scan plays the first 10 seconds of each track.
Press the SCAN or EXIT button when you find
a track you wish to listen to.
Random
Press RND (random) to activate
the random function. The CD
player plays tracks from the
disc in random order. RND is
displayed as long as this func-
tion is activated.
CDs
Using CD discs burned at home could result in
poor or non-existent sound. Music CD discs
complying with the ISO 60908 standard pro-
vide the best sound quality.
IMPORTANT
Only use standard discs (12 cm in diameter). Do not use CDs with adhesive disc labels. The heat in the CD player may cause the label to come off, damaging the CD player.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 233
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Internal CD changer HU-850
10
234
Internal CD changer
HU-850 contains an internal 6-disc CD
changer. Press the CD shortcut key or turn the
SOURCE knob to activate the CD player. The
CD player resumes with the most recently
played CD.
Up to 6 discs can be inserted in the CD player.
An empty slot in the player must be selected
when inserting a disc. This is done by selecting
from buttons 1 - 6. An available position is
shown in the display. Make sure " LOAD
DISC" is shown before inserting a new disc.
CD eject
If you press the button shown in
the illustration, the CD player
stops playing and the disc is
ejected.
NOTE
For reasons of traffic safety, you have twelve seconds to handle the ejected disc. Otherwise, the CD is drawn back into the player and resumes with the most recently played track.
Selecting disc number
Use buttons 1-6 to select which disc is to be
played. The disc and track numbers are shown
in the display.
Fast forward/reverse and change track
Press and hold down the right
or left-hand arrow key to fast
forward/reverse a track or the
whole disc. Fast forward/
reversing cannot be done using
the steering wheel keypad.
Briefly press the left or right-hand arrow key to
go to the previous or next track. The steering
wheel keypad can also be used for this. Track
numbers are shown in the display.
Scanning
Scan plays the first ten seconds of each track.
Press the SCAN or EXIT button when you find
a track you wish to listen to.
Random
Press RND (random) to activate
the random function. A ran-
domly selected track is played
from a randomly selected disc.
A new track or disc is then
selected the same way. RND is
displayed while this function is active.
CD discs
Using CD discs burned at home could result in
poor or non-existent sound. Music CD discs
complying with the ISO 60908 standard pro-
vide the best sound quality.
IMPORTANT
Only use standard discs (12 cm in diameter). Do not use CDs with adhesive disc labels. The heat in the CD player may cause the label to come off, damaging the CD player.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 234
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
External CD changer HU-450/650/850*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 235
CD changer
G 02
71 81
The external CD changer is mounted behind
the panel on the rear left-hand side of the cargo
area.
Activate the CD changer mode by turning the
SOURCE knob; the CD changer resumes play-
ing the most recently played disc and track. If
the CD player cartridge is empty, LOAD
CARTRIDGE will be shown in the display.
Loading discs in the CD changer 1. Slide open the CD changer cover
2. Press the cartridge eject button on the
changer.
3. Pull out the CD cartridge and insert the
discs.
4. Reinsert the cartridge in the CD changer.
Selecting discs
Select which disc is to be played by turning the
PRESET/CD knob (HU-450) or using buttons
1 - 6 (HU-650/850). The disc and track num-
bers are shown in the display.
Some CD changers take 10 discs. Press and
hold button 6 for a couple of seconds to select
discs 7 - 10.
Fast forward/reverse and change track
Press and hold down the right
or left-hand arrow key to fast
forward/reverse a track or the
whole disc. Fast forward/
reversing cannot be done using
the steering wheel keypad.
Briefly press the left or right-hand arrow key to
go to the previous or next track. The steering
wheel keypad can also be used for this. Track
numbers are shown in the display.
Scanning
Scan plays the first 10 seconds of each track.
Press the SCAN or EXIT button when you find
a track you wish to listen to.
Random
Press RND (HU-650 and 850)
to activate the Random func-
tion. For radio HU-450, it is acti-
vated with the REV button.
A randomly selected track is
played from a randomly
selected disc. A new track or disc is then
selected the same way. RND is displayed as
long as this function is activated.
CDs
Using CD discs burned at home could result in
poor or non-existent sound. Music CD discs
complying with the ISO 60908 standard pro-
vide the best sound quality.
IMPORTANT
Only use standard discs (12 cm in diameter). Do not use CDs with adhesive disc labels. The heat in the CD player may cause the label to come off, damaging the CD player.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 235
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II HU-850
10
236
General
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II is a further refine-
ment of the previous system and provides a
significantly improved sound experience. This
improvement is especially noticeable to rear
seat passengers.
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II together with a
centre speaker in the instrument panel offers a
sound experience very close to being there.
The normal left-right stereo channels are divi-
ded into left-centre-right. In addition, surround
sound is produced by the rear speakers. Dolby
Surround Pro Logic II works in CD mode.
3-channel stereo ( 3-CH) is recommended for
AM and FM radio transmissions.
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II is a trademark of
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Dolby Pro Logic II Surround System is manu-
factured under license from Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II Mode
To select Dolby Surround Pro
Logic II Mode press PL II.
PL II is shown in the dis-
play Press OFF to return to 2-
channel stereo.
3-channel stereo
Select 3-channel stereo by
pressing 3-CH. " 3 ch" will be
shown in the display. Resume
2-channel stereo function by
pressing OFF.
Centre Level
This function is used to set the level of the cen-
tre channel.
1. Press SOURCE.
2. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED
MENU and press SOURCE.
3. Turn SOURCE, select AUDIO SETTINGS and press SOURCE.
4. Turn SOURCE, select CENTRE LEVEL and press SOURCE.
5. Turn SOURCE, select level and press
SOURCE.
6. Press EXIT.
Surround Level
This function is used to set the output level of
the rear channels.
1. Press SOURCE.
2. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED
MENU and press SOURCE.
3. Turn SOURCE, select AUDIO SETTINGS and press SOURCE.
4. Turn SOURCE, select SURROUND
LEVEL and press SOURCE.
5. Turn SOURCE, select level and press
SOURCE.
6. Press EXIT.
Mid EQ Level
This function is used to fine-tune the sound
from the speakers.
1. Press SOURCE.
2. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED
MENU and press SOURCE.
3. Turn SOURCE, select AUDIO SETTINGS and press SOURCE.
4. Turn SOURCE, select MID EQ LEVEL and
press SOURCE.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 236
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II HU-850
10
237
5. Turn SOURCE, select level and press
SOURCE.
6. Press EXIT.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 237
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Technical data
10
238
HU-450 HU-650 HU-850
Output 4 25 W 4 25 W 1 25 W (centre loudspeaker)
Impedance 4 Ohm
Operating voltage 12 V, negative ground
External amplifier 4 50 W or 4 75 W A 4 50 W or 4 75 W B
Radio
Frequency
U (FM) 87.5 108 MHz
M (AM) 522 1611 kHz
L (AM) 153 279 kHz
A Option B HU-850 must be connected to an external amplifier.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 238
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 239
G 02
71 95
Phone system components
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 239
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
240 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General rules
Put traffic safety first! If when driving you require to use the privacy handset in the armrest, park the car in a safe place first.
Switch off the phone when refuelling.
Switch off the phone in areas where blast- ing work is being carried out.
Only allow authorised personnel service your phone.
Emergency calls
Emergency calls to emergency services can be
made without the ignition key or the SIM card.
1.
2. Ring the emergency number that applies to
your region (within EU: 112).
3. Press the green button .
Phone system components
1. Keypad on centre console All phone functions can be controlled via the
keypad in the centre console.
2. Steering wheel keypad The majority of phone functions can be con-
trolled via the steering wheel keypad.
When the phone is active, the steering wheel
keypad can only be used for phone functions.
Phone information is shown continuously in the
display when the phone is activated. The
phone must be deactivated in order to use the
buttons for radio settings, see page 241.
3. Display The display will show menu functions, mes-
sages, phone numbers, etc.
4. Privacy handset The privacy handset can be used for private
conversations when you do not wish to be dis-
turbed.
5. SIM card The SIM card is inserted below the keypad in
the centre console.
Switch off the phone whenever a SIM card is
not in use. Otherwise, messages from other
functions cannot be shown in the display.
6. Microphone The microphone is integrated in the rearview
mirror.
7. Loudspeaker The speaker is integrated in the driver's seat
head restraint.
8. Antenna The antenna is mounted against the wind-
screen in front of the rearview mirror.
SIM card
G 02
72 86
The phone can only be used with a valid SIM
card (Subscriber Identity Module). Your net-
work operator supplies this card.
Always insert the SIM card when you wish to
use the phone. The name of your network oper-
ator will be displayed.
Switch off the phone whenever a SIM card is
not in use. Otherwise, messages from other
functions cannot be displayed and the radio
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 240
evastarck
Press the On/Off button
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 241
controls in the steering wheel keypad cannot
be used.
Switching the phone on and off
G 02
72 85
To switch the phone on 1. Turn the ignition key to position I.
2. Press the button marked in the illustration.
To switch the phone off Press the same button for three seconds.
If you switch off the car's ignition while the
phone is switched on, it will be on the next time
you switch on the ignition.
Phone calls cannot be received if the phone is
switched off.
Active mode
The phone must be in active mode for its func-
tions to be available for use (does not apply to
receiving calls). Activate the phone by pressing
in the keypad in the centre console or in
the steering wheel keypad.
Phone information is shown continuously in the
display when the phone is activated.
Press to deactivate the phone.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 241
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Call options
10
242
Display
G 02
71 80
The display will show the function in use, for
example menu selections, messages, phone
numbers or settings.
Making and receiving calls
To dial
Dial the number and press on the steer-
ing wheel or centre console keypad (or lift the
handset).
To receive an incoming call
Press (or lift the handset). You can also
use Automatic Answer. See menu function 4.3.
The car's audio system can be muted auto-
matically while a phone call is in progress. With
regard to the audio equipment sound level, see
also menu option 5.6.5 on page 250.
Ending a call
To end a call, press on one of the key-
pads or hang up the handset. The audio sys-
tem resumes its previous activity.
Last dialled numbers
The phone automatically stores the last phone
numbers/names called.
1. Press on the steering wheel or cen-
tre console keypad.
2. Use the arrows to scroll forward or
backward through the last num-
bers dialled.
3. Press (or lift the privacy handset) to
make the call.
Privacy handset
G 02
71 93
If you wish to talk undisturbed, use the privacy
handset.
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the number on the centre console key-
pad.
3. Press to dial.
Adjust the volume with the dial on the side of
the handset. The call is ended when you
replace the handset in its holder.
If you wish to switch to handsfree
without ending the call 1.
Press and select Handsfree.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 242
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Call options
10
243
2. Press and hang up the handset, see
page 242.
Speed dial
Storing speed dial numbers A number stored in the phone book can be
linked to a speed dial button (1 - 9). Proceed as
follows:
1. Scroll with to Edit memory (Menu
3) and press .
2. Scroll to Speed dial (Menu 3.4) and press
.
3. Select which number is to be the speed dial
number. Press to confirm.
4. Find the desired name or phone number in
the memory and press to select it.
Using speed dial Press the desired speed dial button for about
two seconds to make a call.
NOTE
Once you switch on the phone, wait a moment before using speed dial. If you wish to use a speed dial number then Menu 4.5 must be activated.see page 250
Functions during a call
The following functions are available during a
call:
Scroll with the arrows and press to
make a selection.
Secret mode/ Secret mode off
Secret mode
Hold/Don't hold Choose whether or
not the call is to be
put on hold
Handset/Handsfree Use the handset or
handsfree
Memory Show stored num-
bers
The following functions are available when you
have a current call and a parked call:
Scroll with the arrows and press to
make a selection.
Secret mode/ Secret mode off
Secret mode
Handset/Handsfree Use the handset or
handsfree
Memory Show stored num-
bers
Three-way calling Speak with both
parties simultane-
ously (conference
call)
Switch Switch between the
two calls
The following functions are available when you
have selected Three-way calling and have
two calls in progress:
Scroll with the arrows and press to
make a selection.
Secret mode/ Secret mode off
Secret mode
Handset/Handsfree Use the handset or
handsfree
Memory Show stored num-
bers
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 243
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Call options
10
244
Call waiting
If you hear a tone in the speaker when the
phone is engaged followed by a two-tone sig-
nal, another party is placing a call to your
phone. The two-tone signal will repeat until you
answer the call or ringing ceases. When this
occurs, you may accept or decline the call.
If you do not wish to take the call, press
or do nothing. If you do wish to take the
call, press . Your current call will be put
in "park mode". If you press , both calls
will be terminated.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 244
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Memory functions
10
245
SMS
A single two-tone signal indicates that you
have received an SMS message.
Volume
Raise the volume with the (+) button in the
steering wheel keypad. Lower the volume with
the () button.
When the phone is activated, the steering
wheel keypad only controls the phone func-
tions.
If you wish to adjust radio settings using these
buttons you must first deactivate the phone,
see page 241.
Storing in the memory
Phone numbers and names can be stored in
either the phone memory or the SIM card mem-
ory.
When you accept a phone call from a party
whose number is stored in the memory, their
name will be shown in the display.
The phone memory can store up to 255 names.
Storing phone numbers with names
1. Press and scroll to Edit memory
(Menu 3). Press .
2. Scroll to New number (Menu 3.1) and
press .
3. Enter a number and press .
4. Enter a name and press .
5. Choose in which memory to save with
and press .
Enter a name (or message)
Press the button with the desired character:
once for the first character, twice for the sec-
ond, etc. Press 1 to enter a space.
space 1- ? ! , . : ' ( )
a b c 2
d e f 3
g h i 4
j k l 5
m n o 6
p q r s 7
t u v 8
w x y z 9
if you enter two letters in a row
from the same button,
press * between them or wait
a few seconds
+ 0 @ * # & $ / %
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 245
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Memory functions
10
246
change between upper and
lower case letters
delete the last letter or number
entered. If you press for a long
time, the enter number or text
is deleted.
Dialling from the memory
Press in the centre console or in
the steering wheel keypad.
Choose from the following alternatives:
1. Press in the centre console or in the
steering wheel keypad and browse with the
arrows until you locate the required name.
2. Press the key of the first letter in the name
(or enter the name) and press .
3. Press to dial the selected number.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 246
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Menu functions
10
247
General
Use the menu function when checking func-
tions, changing settings and programming new
functions in your system. The various menu
selections will be shown in the display.
Press to access the menu function.
The following applies in the menu function:
A long press on means you exit the
menu function.
A short press on means that you
retract, cancel or reject an alternative.
A press on means that you confirm
or select, or that you scroll from a submenu to the next submenu.
The right arrow leads to the next
side menu.
The left arrow leads to the previ-
ous side menu.
Shortcuts The menu options are numbered and can be
selected directly using the number keys and
. The numbers are shown in the display
together with the menu option.
Traffic safety For reasons of safety, the menu system cannot
be accessed at speeds in excess of 8 km/h.
You may only complete activities in the menu
system that have already been started.
The speed limiter can be disconnected using
menu function 5.7.
Main menus/submenus
1. Call register
1.1. Missed calls
1.2. Received calls
1.3. Dialled calls
1.4. Erase list
1.4.1. All
1.4.2. Missed
1.4.3. Received
1.4.4. Dialled
1.5. Call duration
1.5.1. Last call
1.5.2. Call count
1.5.3. Total time
1.5.4. Clear
2. Messages
2.1. Read
2.2. Write
2.3. Voice message
2.4. Settings
2.4.1. SMSC number
2.4.2. Validity
2.4.3. Type
3. Edit memory
3.1. New number
3.2. Search
3.2.1. Edit
3.2.2. Erase
3.2.3. Copy
3.2.4. Move
3.3. Copy all
3.3.1. SIM to phone
3.3.2. Phone to SIM
3.4. Speed dial
3.5. Erase SIM
3.6. Empty memory
3.7. Status
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 247
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Menu functions
10
248
4. Call options
4.1. Send my no.
4.2. Call waiting
4.3. Auto answer
4.4. Auto redial
4.5. Speed dial
4.6. Call divert service
4.6.1. All calls
4.6.2. When engag.
4.6.3. Not answered
4.6.4. Not available
4.6.5. Fax calls
4.6.6. Data calls
4.6.7. Cancel all
5. Settings
5.1. Factory sett.
5.2. Network
5.3. Language
5.3.1. English UK
5.3.2. English US
5.3.3. Svenska
5.3.4. Dansk
5.3.5. Suomi
5.3.6. Deutsch
5.3.7. Nederlands
5.3.8. Franais FR
5.3.9. Franais CAN
5.3.10. Italiano
5.3.11. Espaol
5.3.12. Portugus P
5.3.13. Portugus BR
5.4. SIM security
5.4.1. On
5.4.2. Off
5.4.3. AUTO
5.5. Change codes
5.5.1. PIN code
5.5.2. Phone code
5.6. Sounds
5.6.1. Ringer volume
5.6.2. Ring signal
5.6.3. Button click
5.6.4. Speed volume
5.6.5. Radio Auto Suppres-
sion
5.6.6. New SMS
5.7. Traffic safety
Menu options, description
1. Call register
1.1. Missed calls A list of missed calls is shown here. You can
choose to call, erase or store the number in the
phone or SIM card memory for later use.
1.2. Received calls A list of received calls is shown here. You can
choose to call, erase or store the number in the
phone or SIM card memory for later use.
1.3. Dialled calls A list of dialled numbers is shown here. You can
choose to call, erase or store the number in the
phone or SIM card memory for later use.
1.4. Erase list This option can be used to erase the list of
menus 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3 as follows.
1.4.1. All
1.4.2. Missed
1.4.3. Received
1.4.4. Dialled
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 248
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Menu functions
10
249
1.5. Call duration Here you can see the duration of all your calls
or the most recent. You can also see the num-
ber of calls and clear the call timer.
1.5.1. Last call
1.5.2. Call count
1.5.3. Total time
1.5.4. Clear
Resetting the call timer requires the phone
code (see Menu 5.5).
2. Messages
2.1. Read Here you can read received text messages.
You can then choose to erase the message,
forward it, change or save the entire message
or parts of it.
2.2. Write You can write a text message using the key-
pad. Then choose to save or send it.
2.3. Voice message Listen to received messages.
2.4. Settings Enter the number (SMSC number) of the mes-
sage centre to which you want your messages
transferred. Specify how the message is to
reach the addressee and how long it is to be
stored in the message centre.
2.4.1. SMSC number
2.4.2. Validity
2.4.3. Type
Contact your service provider for information
on these settings and for an SMSC number.
3. Edit memory
3.1. New number You can store names and phone numbers in
the phone or SIM card memory. See the sec-
tion on memory functions for more information.
3.2. Search Changes in the memory can be made here.
3.2.1. Edit: Change data in the different
memories.
3.2.2. Erase: Remove a saved name.
3.2.3. Copy: Copy a saved name.
3.2.4. Move: Transfer information between
the memory of the phone and the SIM
card.
3.3. Copy all: Copy phone numbers and names from the SIM
card to the phone memory.
3.3.1. From SIM to phone memory
3.3.2. From phone to SIM memory
3.4. Speed dial A number stored in the phone book can be
stored as a speed dial number.
3.5. Erase SIM The entire memory of the SIM card can be
erased.
3.6. Empty memory The entire memory of the phone can be erased.
3.7. Status See how many places in the SIM card or phone
memory are occupied by names and numbers.
4. Call options
4.1. Send my no. Select whether or not your own number should
be displayed to the person you call. Contact
your network operator regarding permanently
withheld numbers.
4.2. Call waiting Choose whether or not you want to be alerted
during a phone call that there is another call
coming in.
4.3. Auto answer Chose to answer without using the keypad.
4.4. Automatic redial Choose to call a previously dialled number that
was busy.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 249
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Menu functions
10
250
4.5. Speed dial Here you set whether or not speed dial is to be
active. The function must be activated if you
wish to dial using speed dial numbers.
4.6. Diversions Here you can choose when and what type of
calls are to be diverted to a specified phone
number.
When engag.
All calls (this setting only applies during
the call in progress).
4.6.3. Not answered
4.6.4. Not available
4.6.5. Fax calls
4.6.6. Data calls
4.6.7. Cancel all
5. Settings
5.1. Factory settings Function to return to the system's factory set-
tings.
5.2. Network selection
5.3. Language Here you can choose which language the
phone is to display.
5.3.1. English UK
5.3.2. English US
5.3.3. Svenska
5.3.4. Dansk
5.3.5. Suomi
5.3.6. Deutsch
5.3.7. Nederlands
5.3.8. Franais FR
5.3.9. Franais CAN
5.3.10. Italiano
5.3.11. Espaol
5.3.12. Portugus P
4.9.13. Portugus BR
5.4. SIM security Choose if the PIN code is to be on, off, or auto-
matic.
5.4.1. On
5.4.2. Off
5.4.3. AUTO
5.5. Change codes Change the PIN code or phone code.
5.5.1. PIN code
5.5.2. Phone code (use 1234 until you
change to your own code). The phone
code is used to reset the call timer.
NOTE
Make a note of your code as save it in a safe place.
5.6. Volume 5.6.1 . Ringer volume: Here you can choose
the volume of the ringer for incoming
calls.
5.6.2. Ring signal: You have eight different
types of ring signals to choose from.
5.6.3. Button click: On or Off.
5.6.4. Speed volume: Choose whether the
volume should be adjusted according
to speed.
5.6.5. Radio Auto Suppression: Here you
choose whether or not the volume of
the radio should remain the same dur-
ing phone calls.
5.6.6. Select whether or not you wish the
phone to notify of new SMS messages
with an audible signal.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 250
evastarck
4.6.1.
4.6.2.
10 Infotainment system
Menu functions
10
251
5.7. Traffic safety Here you can choose to disengage the speed
limiter for the menu system, i.e. choose to use
the menu system even while driving.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 251
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Miscellaneous information
10
252
Radio/Phone
G 02
72 88
The four lower buttons on the steering wheel
keypad are common to the audio system and
phone.
The phone must be in active mode in order to
adjust the phone functions with these buttons,
see page 241.
If you wish to adjust radio settings using these
buttons you must first deactivate the phone.
Press .
Double SIM cards 1
G 02
72 86
Many network operators offer double SIM
cards - one for your car and one for another
phone. A double SIM card allows you to have
the same number for two different phones.
Ask your network operator about the options
available and the use of double SIM cards.
Specifications
Output 2 W
SIM card Small
Memory entries 255 A
SMS
(Short Message
Service)
Yes
Data/Fax No
Dualband Yes (900/1800)
A The phone memory contains 255 positions. The number of SIM card memory positions varies depending on your sub- scription.
IMEI number
To block the phone, you must provide your
network operator with the phone's IMEI num-
ber. This is a 15-digit serial number that is
programmed in the phone.
Dial *#06# to show this number in the dis-
play.
Make a note of this number and keep it in a safe
place.
1 Certain markets
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 252
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
10
253
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 253
evastarck
G 00
00 00
254
Type designation................................................................................... 256
Dimensions and weights....................................................................... 258
Engine specifications............................................................................ 260
Engine oil............................................................................................... 262
Fluids and lubricants............................................................................. 264
Fuel....................................................................................................... 266
Catalytic converter................................................................................ 269
Electrical system................................................................................... 270
Type approval....................................................................................... 272
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 254
evastarck
11 SPECIF ICATIONS
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 255
evastarck
11 Specifications
Type designation
11
256
G 03
20 69
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 256
evastarck
11 Specifications
Type designation
11
257
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle
identification and engine numbers can facili-
tate all contact with an authorised Volvo dealer
regarding the car and when ordering spare
parts and accessories.
Type designation, vehicle identification
number, maximum permissible weights,
codes for colour and upholstery and type
approval number.
Label for parking heater.
Engine type designation, component and
serial number.
The engine oil decal (certain engine vari-
ants) specifies oil grade and viscosity.
Gearbox type designation and serial num-
ber
Manual gearbox.
Automatic gearbox AW
VIN number (type and model year desig-
nation plus chassis number).
Further information on the car is presented in
the registration document.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 257
evastarck
11 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
11
258
Dimensions
G020131
Posi- tion in illus- tra- tion
Dimensions mm
A Wheelbase 2715
B Length 4603
C Load length,
floor, folded seat
1661
D Load length, floor 824
Posi- tion in illus- tra- tion
Dimensions mm
E Height 1428
F Front track 1561
G Rear track 1542
Posi- tion in illus- tra- tion
Dimensions mm
H Width 1871
I Width including
door mirrors
2069
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 258
evastarck
11 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
11
259
Weights
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank
90% full and all fluids.
The weight of passengers and accessories,
such as a towbar, load carriers, space box etc.
and towball load (when a trailer is hitched, see
table), influences the payload and must not be
included in the kerb weight.
Permitted weight (in addition to driver) = Gross
vehicle weight - Kerb weight.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed.
G 01
60 08
Max. total weight
Max. train weight (car+trailer)
Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load
Equipment level
Max. load: See registration document.
Maximum roof load: 100 kg
Trailer with brakes:
Maximum trailer weight (kg)
Maximum tow- ball load (kg)
0-1200 50
1201-1600 75
Trailer without brakes
Maximum trailer weight kg
Maximum tow- ball load kg
750 50
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 259
evastarck
11 Specifications
Engine specifications
11
260
2.4 2.4i 2.0T 2.5T 2.4T
Engine designation A B5244S2 B5244S B5204T5 B5254T2 B5244T4 B
Output (kW/rpm) 103/4500 125/6000 132/5500 154/5000 162/5500
(hp/rpm) 140/4500 170/6000 180/5500 210/5000 220/5500
Torque (Nm/rpm) 220/3300 225/4500 240/1850-5000 320/1500-4500 350/2100-4000
No. of cylinders 5 5 5 5 5
Bore (mm) 83 83 81 83 81
Stroke (mm) 90 90 77 93.2 93.2
Swept volume (litres) 2.44 2.44 1.98 2.52 2.4
Compression ratio 10.3:1 10.3:1 9.5:1 9.0:1 8.5:1
A Engine type designation, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 256. B Thailand, Malaysia
T5 D 2.4D D5
Engine designation A B5244T5 D5244T7 D5244T5 D5244T4
Output (kW/rpm) 191/5500 92/4000 120/5500 136/4000
(hp/rpm) 260/5500 126/4000 163/5500 185/4000
Torque (Nm/rpm) 350/2100-5000 300/1750-2250 340/1750-2750 400/2000-2750
No. of cylinders 5 5 5 5
Bore (mm) 81 81 81 81
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 260
evastarck
11 Specifications
Engine specifications
11
261
T5 D 2.4D D5
Stroke (mm) 93.2 93.2 93.2 93.2
Swept volume (litres) 2.40 2.40 2.40 2.40
Compression ratio 8.5:1 17.0:1 17.0:1 17.0:1
A Engine type designation, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 256.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 261
evastarck
11 Specifications
Engine oil
11
262
Adverse driving conditions
Check the oil level more frequently for long
journeys:
towing a caravan or trailer.
in mountainous regions.
at high speeds.
in temperatures colder than -30 C or hot- ter than +40 C.
This can produce abnormally high oil tempera-
ture or oil consumption.
Also check the oil level more often if the car is
often driven short distances (less than 10 km)
when temperatures are low (below +5 C).
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse
driving conditions. It provides extra protection
for the engine.
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter- vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil (see the engine compartment decal) for both filling and oil change, other- wise you will risk affecting service life, star- ting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war- ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.
Viscosity chart
G 02
02 36
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 262
evastarck
11 Specifications
Engine oil
11
263
Oil decal
Engine variant Filling volume between MIN MAX (litres)
Volume A (litres)
G 03
20 78
The adjacent oil decal shown here is fitted in the
car's engine compartment, see page 256.
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
Viscosity: SAE 0W30
2.0T B5204T5 1.2 5.5
2.4 B5244S
B5244S2
2.4T B5244T4 B
T5 B5244T5
2.5T B5254T2
D5 D5244T4 2.0 6.2
2.4D D5244T5
D D5244T7
A Including filter change. B Thailand, Malaysia
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 263
evastarck
11 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
11
264
Fluid System Volume (litres) Recommended oil grade:
Gearbox oil Manual 5 speed (M56/M58) 2.1 Transmission fluid: MTF 97309
Manual 6-speed (M66) 2.0 Transmission fluid: MTF 97309
Automatic gearbox (AW55-50,
AW55-51)
7.2 Transmission fluid JWS 3309
Automatic gearbox (TF-80SC) 7.0
Coolant Petrol engine without turbo 8.0 Coolant with corrosion inhibitor mixed with
water A, see packaging. The thermostat starts
opening at: 90 C in petrol engines and at 82 C
in diesel engines.
Petrol engine with turbo 9.0
Diesel 12.5
Air conditioning B Oil: PAG
Refrigerant R134a (HFC134a)
Brake fluid 0.6 DOT 4+
Power steering System:
of which reservoir
0.9
0.2
Power steering fluid: WSS M2C204-A or equiv-
alent product.
Washer fluid without high-pressure washing 4.5 Use a washer antifreeze recommended by
Volvo, mixed with water for temperatures below
freezing.with high-pressure washing 6.4
A Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1. B Weights may vary depending on the engine variant. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for the exact information.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 264
evastarck
11 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
11
265
IMPORTANT
The recommended transmission fluid must be used to prevent damage to the gearbox. Do not mix with any other transmission fluid. If the transmission is topped up with a dif- ferent fluid, contact an authorised Volvo workshop for servicing.
NOTE
Under normal driving conditions the gear- box oil does not need changing during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions, see page 262
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 265
evastarck
11 Specifications
Fuel
11
266
Consumption, emissions and volume
Engine Gearbox Consumption litre/100 km
Emissions of carbon dioxide (CO2) g/km
Tank vol- ume (litres)
2.4 B5244S2 Manual 5 speed (M56) 8.8 209 70
2.4 B5244S2 Automatic gearbox (AW55-51) 9.5 226 70
2.4i B5244S Manual 5 speed (M56) 8.9 212 70
2.4i B5244S Automatic gearbox (AW55-51) 9.5 226 70
2.0T B5204T5 Manual 5 speed (M56) 8.9 212 70
2.0T B5254T5 Automatic gearbox (AW55-51) 9.5 227 70
2.5T B5254T2 Manual 5 speed (M56) 9.1 217 70
2.5T B5254T2 Automatic gearbox (AW55-51) 9.8 234 70
2.5T B5254T2
AWD
Manual 5-speed (M58) 9.7 232 72
2.5T B5254T2
AWD
Automatic gearbox (AW55-51) 10.2 244 72
2.4T B5244T4* 70
T5 B5244T5 Manual 6-speed (M66) 9.3 220 70
T5 B5244T5 Automatic gearbox (AW55-51) 9.8 234 70
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 266
evastarck
11 Specifications
Fuel
11
267
Engine Gearbox Consumption litre/100 km
Emissions of carbon diox- ide (CO2) g/km
Tank volume (litres)
D5 D5244T4 Automatic gearbox (TF-80SC) 7.5 199 70
D5 D5244T4 Manual 6-speed (M66) 6.6 174 70
2.4D D5244T5 Automatic gearbox (TF-80SC) 7.5 199 70
2.4D D5244T5 Manual 6-speed (M66) 6.6 174 70
2.4D D5244T5 Manual 5 speed (M56) 6.4 169 70
D D5244T7 Manual 5 speed (M56) 6.4 169 70
Fuel consumption and emissions of carbon dioxide
Official fuel consumption figures are based on
a standard driving cycle in accordance with EU
Directive 80/1268comb. Fuel consumption fig-
ures may change if the car is equipped with
extra equipment that affects the car's weight.
The manner in which the car is driven, and
other non-technical factors can also affect fuel
consumption. Consumption is higher and
power output lower for fuel with an octane rat-
ing of 91 RON.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, towing a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combination with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car's performance.
Petrol
Most engines can be run with octane ratings of
91, 95 and 98 RON.
91 RON must not be used for 4-cylinder engines and should only be used in excep- tional cases with other engines.
95 RON can be used for normal driving.
98 RON is recommended for optimum per- formance and minimum fuel consumption.
When driving in temperatures above +38 C,
fuel with the highest possible octane rating is
recommended for optimum performance and
fuel economy.
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 267
evastarck
11 Specifications
Fuel
11
268
Petrol Norm EN 228
IMPORTANT
Use only unleaded petrol to avoid damaging the catalytic converter. In order for the Volvo warranty to apply, never mix alcohol with petrol, the fuel system could be damaged.
Diesel
The diesel engine's fuel system is sensitive to
contaminants. Only use diesel from well-
known oil companies, see page 188.
Diesel Norm EN 590 or JIS K2204
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 268
evastarck
11 Specifications
Catalytic converter
11
269
General
The purpose of the catalytic converter is to
purify exhaust gases. It is located in the flow of
exhaust gases close to the engine so that it
quickly reaches operating temperature. The
catalytic converter consists of a monolith
(ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel
walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum,
rhodium and palladium. These metals act as
catalysts, i.e. they participate in and accelerate
a chemical reaction without being used up
themselves.
Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor
The Lambda-sond is part of a control system
intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel
economy.
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content
of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This
value is fed into an electronic system that con-
tinuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel
to air directed to the engine is continuously
adjusted. Together with the three-way catalytic
converter, these adjustments create optimal
conditions for efficient combustion of the
harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, carbon
monoxide and nitrous oxides).
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 269
evastarck
11 Specifications
Electrical system
11
270
General
12 V system with a voltage-regulated alterna-
tor. Single pole system in which the chassis
and engine block are used as conductors.
Battery
Voltage 12 V 12 V 12 V
Cold start capacity (CCA) 590 A 600 A A 700 A B
Reserve capacity (RC) 100 min 120 min 135 min
Capacity (Ah) 60 70 80
A Cars equipped with High Performance audio system. B Cars equipped with diesel, keyless drive, Premium Sound audio system, fuel-driven heater or RTI.
If the battery is changed, replace it with a bat-
tery of the same cold start capacity and reserve
capacity as the original (see the decal on the
battery).
Bulbs
Lighting Output W Socket
Dipped beam 55 H7
Bi-Xenon 35 D2S
Main beam 55 HB3
Brake lights, reversing lamps, rear fog lamp 21 BA15s
Direction indicators, rear/front (yellow) 21 BAU15s
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 270
evastarck
11 Specifications
Electrical system
11
271
Lighting Output W Socket
Rear position/parking lamps, rear side marker lamps 5 BAY15d
Courtesy lighting, cargo area lighting, number plate lighting 5 SV8.5
Vanity mirror 1.2 SV5.5
Front position/parking lamps, front side marker lamps 5 W 2.1 x 9.5d
Direction indicators in door mirrors (yellow) 5 W 2.1 x 9.5d
Fog lamps 55 H11
Glovebox lighting 3 BA9
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 271
evastarck
11 Specifications
Type approval
11
272
Remote control system
Country
A, B, CY, CZ, D, DK,
E, EST, F, FIN, GB,
GR, H, I, IRL, L, LT,
LV, M, NL, P, PL, S,
SK, SLO
Delphi hereby
certifies that this
remote control sys-
tem conforms to the
essential character-
istic requirements
and other relevant
regulations of direc-
tive 1999/5/EC.
IS, LI, N, CH
HR
RC
ETC093LPD0155
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 272
evastarck
12 Alphabetical Index
12
273
A
A/C
manual climate control......................... 76
ABS fault.................................................... 44
Active Bi-Xenon Lights...................... 50, 52
Active chassis FOUR-C.................. 48, 129
Adaptive system...................................... 123
Additional heater........................................ 84
Adjusting headlamp pattern.................... 145
Bi-Xenon headlamp......................... 149
Halogen headlamp............................. 146
Adjusting the steering wheel...................... 60
AF automatic frequency update........... 229
Airbag
activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 22
driver's and front passenger side......... 19
Air conditioning
ECC...................................................... 78
general.................................................. 74
Air conditioning, AC................................... 76
Air distribution...................................... 75, 81
Air distribution, A/C................................... 77
Air vents
instrument panel................................... 75
Alarm
alarm indicator.................................... 108
alarm signals....................................... 109
arming................................................. 108
automatic alarm activation................. 108
deactivating a triggered alarm............ 109
disarming............................................ 108
general................................................ 108
RDS traffic warning............................. 226
All-wheel drive, AWD............................... 124
Audio functions
HU-450............................................... 219
HU-450/650/850................................. 217
HU-650/850........................................ 220
Audio HU-450, overview.......................... 214
Audio HU-650, overview.......................... 215
Audio HU-850, overview.......................... 216
Audio volume
phone.................................................. 245
AUTO
climate control settings........................ 78
Automatic car washes............................. 176
Automatic gearbox.......................... 121, 123
Lock-up function................................ 123
safety systems.................................... 123
towing and recovery........................... 132
trailer................................................... 135
W button............................................. 122
Automatic locking.................................... 104
AUX.......................................................... 217
volume................................................ 217
Auxiliary lamps........................................... 50
Average fuel consumption......................... 54
AWD, All-wheel drive............................... 124
B
Backrest
front seat, lowering............................... 88
Backrest rear seat, lowering...................... 96
Bag holder................................................. 97
Battery..................................................... 194
maintenance............................... 185, 194
specifications...................................... 270
start assistance................................... 134
warning symbols................................. 194
Blind spot (BLIS)...................................... 153
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS 48, 152
Bonnet..................................................... 186
Bonnet, opening...................................... 186
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 273
evastarck
12 Alphabetical Index
12
274
Booster cushion, integrated...................... 33
Bottle holder for rear seat passengers...... 95
Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 192
Brakes
Anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 125
handbrake............................................. 46
Brake system........................................... 125
Bulbs, see Lighting.......................... 196, 270
C
Calls
functions during a call........................ 243
Car care................................................... 176
Car care, leather upholstery.................... 178
Cargo area................................................. 97
bag holder............................................. 97
locking.................................................. 49
Car upholstery......................................... 178
Car wash.................................................. 176
Cassette player, HU-450......................... 231
Catalytic converter................................... 269
recovery.............................................. 133
CD changer, external............................... 235
CD player, HU-650.................................. 233
Chassis settings....................................... 129
Checking and topping up the coolant..... 191
Checks
fluids and oils...................................... 189
Children..................................................... 30
child safety locks................................ 107
child seats and side airbags................. 24
location in the car................................. 30
location in the car, table....................... 31
safety.................................................... 30
Child seat................................................... 30
Child seats................................................. 30
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats. . . 34
recommended...................................... 31
Cigarette lighter socket.............................. 49
rear seat................................................ 61
Cleaning
automatic car washes......................... 176
car wash............................................. 176
rims..................................................... 176
seatbelts............................................. 178
upholstery........................................... 178
water-repellent surface......................... 68
Clock, setting............................................. 42
Clutch fluid, checking & topping up........ 192
Coat hanger............................................... 95
Cold start
automatic gearbox.............................. 123
Collision
crash mode........................................... 29
Inflatable Curtain, IC............................. 26
Colour code, paint................................... 179
Combined instrument panel...................... 42
Compass.................................................... 64
calibration............................................. 67
setting the zone.................................... 64
Condensation in headlamps.................... 176
Control panel............................................. 76
Coolant.................................................... 191
Cruise control............................................ 58
Cup holder..................................... 93, 94, 95
D
Deadlocks
temporary deactivation....................... 106
temporary deactivation of the alarm
detectors....................................... 49, 109
Defroster.............................................. 77, 78
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 274
evastarck
12 Alphabetical Index
12
275
Diesel....................................................... 188
Diesel: engine preheater............................ 46
Diesel particle filter.................................. 117
Direction indicators.................................... 53
Display, messages............................... 47, 82
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II.................... 236
Door mirrors............................................... 67
Driveable punctured tyres........................ 166
Driver's door control panel............ 38, 40, 62
Driving
with trailer........................................... 135
Driving with a trailer
towball load........................................ 259
towing capacity.......................... 135, 259
DSTC, see also Stability control sys-
tem............................................... 46, 48, 127
operation............................................. 127
During a call, functions............................ 243
E
ECO pressure.......................................... 161
table.................................................... 162
Electrical socket
centre console...................................... 49
rear seat................................................ 61
Electrical system...................................... 270
Emergency calls....................................... 240
Emergency equipment
warning triangle.................................. 163
Emergency puncture repair..................... 169
Emission control
fault indicator........................................ 45
Engine compartment
coolant................................................ 191
oil........................................................ 189
overview.............................................. 187
power steering fluid............................ 192
Engine oil......................................... 189, 262
adverse driving conditions.......... 189, 262
capacities........................................... 262
changing............................................. 189
filter..................................................... 189
oil grade.............................................. 262
oil pressure........................................... 45
Engine preheater........................................ 46
Engine specifications............................... 260
EON - Enhanced Other Networks............ 230
Expectant mothers, seatbelt...................... 17
External audio source
AUX-socket......................................... 217
External dimensions................................ 258
F
Fan
A/C........................................................ 76
ECC...................................................... 78
First aid equipment.................................. 164
Floor mats.................................................. 88
Fluids, capacities..................................... 264
Fluids and oils.......................................... 264
Fluids and oils, checks, engine compart-
ment......................................................... 189
Fluids and oils general............................. 185
Fog lamp
front...................................................... 52
Fog lamps
rear........................................................ 52
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 275
evastarck
12 Alphabetical Index
12
276
FOUR-C Active chassis.................. 48, 129
Frequency update, automatic.................. 229
Fuel
fuel consumption, display..................... 54
fuel economy...................................... 161
Fuses....................................................... 203
box in cargo area................................ 209
box in the engine compartment.......... 204
changing............................................. 203
dashboard end................................... 206
general................................................ 203
within the sound barrier...................... 207
G
Gearbox
automatic............................................ 121
manual................................................ 120
Glovebox.................................................... 94
Gross vehicle weight............................... 259
H
Handbrake........................................... 46, 60
Hazard warning flashers............................ 50
Headlamp levelling.................................... 51
Headlamp pattern, adjusting................... 145
Headlamps
ABL....................................................... 52
Off/On................................................... 51
Headlamp washers.................................... 57
Head restraint
centre seat, rear.................................... 96
lowering................................................ 49
Heated front seats..................................... 76
Heating
front seats............................................. 50
rearview and door mirrors........ 50, 76, 78
rear window.............................. 50, 76, 78
High-pressure headlamp washing............. 57
Home safe lighting
setting................................................... 53
HU-450, overview............................ 214, 215
HU-850, overview.................................... 216
I
IMEI number............................................ 252
Immobiliser.............................................. 102
Inflatable Curtain........................................ 26
Information display.................................... 47
Instrument lighting..................................... 52
Instrument overview
left-hand drive....................................... 38
right-hand drive.................................... 40
Integrated booster cushion........................ 33
Interior lighting........................................... 90
Interior rearview mirror............................... 64
automatic dimming............................... 64
Intermittent wiping..................................... 56
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats......... 34
J
Jack......................................................... 163
K
Kerb weight.............................................. 259
Key........................................................... 102
remote control key.............................. 102
Keypad in the steering wheel............ 58, 222
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 276
evastarck
12 Alphabetical Index
12
277
Kick-down
automatic gearbox.............................. 122
L
Lambda-sond.......................................... 269
Leather upholstery, washing instructions 178
Lighting
Active Bi-Xenon Lights, ABL........ 50, 52
automatic lighting, dipped beam.......... 51
automatic lighting, passenger compart-
ment...................................................... 91
bulbs, specifications........................... 270
exterior.................................................. 51
headlamp levelling................................ 51
home safe lighting................................ 53
in passenger compartment................... 90
instrument lighting................................ 52
Lighting panel, passenger compart-
ment...................................................... 51
main/dipped beam............................... 51
position/parking lamps......................... 51
reading lamps....................................... 90
rear fog lamp........................................ 52
switching headlamp pattern right/left-
hand traffic, ABL;.......................... 50, 145
Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 196
bulb location front lamp...................... 196
cargo area........................................... 200
courtesy lighting................................. 202
dipped beam halogen......................... 197
direction indicators............................. 198
fog lamp.............................................. 199
front.................................................... 196
main beam.......................................... 197
number plate lighting.......................... 200
parking lamps..................................... 198
position lamps.................................... 198
rear lamp............................................. 201
side marker lamps.............................. 199
vanity mirror........................................ 202
Loading
load capacity...................................... 143
load carriers........................................ 143
roof load............................................. 143
Load on the roof...................................... 143
Locking/unlocking
inside.................................................. 105
outside................................................ 104
Locks
boot lid.................................................. 49
Lubricants................................................ 264
Lubricants, capacities.............................. 264
M
Main and dipped beam
switching............................................... 53
Main beam "flash"..................................... 53
Maintenance............................................ 185
rustproofing........................................ 180
self-maintenance................................ 185
Manual gearbox....................................... 120
towing and recovery........................... 132
Master key............................................... 102
Menu functions, phone............................ 247
Menu structure
phone, menu options.......................... 248
Messages in BLIS.................................... 154
Messages in the information display......... 47
Meters in the combined instrument panel
fuel gauge............................................. 42
outside temperature gauge.................. 42
speedometer......................................... 42
tachometer........................................... 42
trip meter.............................................. 42
Misting....................................................... 74
condensation in headlamps............... 176
rear window.......................................... 50
removing with defroster function.... 77, 78
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 277
evastarck
12 Alphabetical Index
12
278
N
NEWS...................................................... 217
O
Oil, see also Engine oil............... 45, 189, 262
One-key dial............................................. 243
Oxyhydrogen gas..................................... 134
P
PACOS....................................................... 22
key switch off........................................ 22
PACOS, switch.......................................... 22
Paintwork
colour code......................................... 179
damage and touch-up........................ 179
Panel vents in the door pillar..................... 75
Parking assistance............................. 49, 130
parking assistance sensors................ 131
Parking brake....................................... 46, 60
Parking heater
battery and fuel..................................... 83
general.................................................. 82
Parking lamps............................................ 51
Particle filter....................................... 74, 117
Phone
ending a call....................................... 242
last dialled numbers........................... 242
making calls........................................ 242
memory............................................... 245
on/off.................................................. 241
one-key dial........................................ 243
privacy handset.................................. 242
SIM card............................................. 240
Phone system.......................................... 240
Pinch protection, sunroof.......................... 70
Polishing.................................................. 177
Position lamps........................................... 51
Power seat................................................. 89
Power steering fluid, checking and topping
up............................................................. 192
Power sunroof........................................... 69
Power windows......................................... 62
blocking................................................ 63
passenger seat..................................... 63
rear seat................................................ 63
Privacy handset....................................... 242
PTY Programme type.................... 217, 228
Puncture, see Tyres......................... 163, 167
R
Radio
EON.................................................... 230
frequency update................................ 229
NEWS................................................. 227
PTY..................................................... 228
traffic information................................ 226
tuning.................................................. 222
Radio functions
HU-450............................................... 224
HU-450/650/850................................. 222
Radio text................................................ 230
Rain sensor................................................ 56
RDS functions.......................................... 226
Reading lamps........................................... 90
Rear seat, lowering.................................... 96
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 278
evastarck
12 Alphabetical Index
12
279
Rearview and door mirrors
compass............................................... 64
door...................................................... 67
electrically retractable........................... 67
heating.................................................. 50
interior................................................... 64
retractable............................................. 49
Rear window, defrosting............................ 50
Recirculation
A/C........................................................ 77
Refrigerant................................................. 74
REG - Regional radio programmes......... 229
Relay/fuse box: see Fuses....................... 203
Remote control........................................ 102
functions............................................. 102
replacing the battery........................... 103
Remote control system, type approval.... 272
Resetting the door mirrors......................... 49
Retractable power door mirrors (option). . . 49
Rims
cleaning.............................................. 176
Roof load................................................. 143
Rustproofing............................................ 180
S
SCAN
CD and audio files.............................. 235
radio stations...................................... 222
Seatbelt
pregnancy............................................. 17
Seatbelt reminder...................................... 17
Seatbelts.................................................... 16
Seatbelt tensioner...................................... 18
Seats
heating.................................................. 50
lowering the front backrest................... 88
lowering the rear backrest.................... 96
manual setting...................................... 88
power seat............................................ 89
Service key.............................................. 102
Service programme................................. 184
Settings, clock........................................... 83
Side airbags............................................... 24
SIM card.................................................. 240
double................................................. 252
SIPS bags.................................................. 24
SMS......................................................... 245
Soot filter........................................... 47, 117
SOOT FILTER FULL................................. 117
Spare wheel............................................. 163
Temporary spare................................ 163
Spin control............................................. 127
Spin Control............................................. 127
Spin control function............................... 127
SRS system............................................... 19
general.................................................. 19
SST Self Supporting run flat Tyres....... 166
Stability system........................................ 127
deactivating/activating....................... 127
indicator................................................ 46
symbols.............................................. 127
Stains....................................................... 178
Start assistance....................................... 134
Steering wheel
cruise control........................................ 58
keypad.................................................. 58
steering wheel adjustment.................... 60
Stone chips and scratches...................... 179
Storage compartment.......................... 93, 94
Storage spaces in the passenger compart-
ment........................................................... 92
Sunroof...................................................... 69
opening and closing............................. 69
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 279
evastarck
12 Alphabetical Index
12
280
pinch protection.................................... 70
sunscreen............................................. 70
ventilation position................................ 69
Sunscreen, sunroof.................................... 70
Switching
main and dipped beam......................... 53
Symbols
indicator symbols................................. 44
stability system................................... 127
warning symbols................................... 44
T
Tailgate
locking/unlocking................................ 102
Temperature
passenger compartment, electronic cli-
mate control.......................................... 78
passenger compartment, manual cli-
mate control.......................................... 76
Tools........................................................ 163
Towbar............................................. 135, 139
Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 137
Towing..................................................... 132
towing eye.......................................... 132
Towing capacity............................... 135, 259
Towing equipment................................... 135
general........................................ 135, 137
installation........................................... 139
removing............................................. 141
specifications...................................... 138
Towing eye............................................... 132
TPMS Tyre Pressure Monitoring........... 165
TP Traffic information.................... 217, 226
Traction control system........................... 127
Trailer....................................................... 135
cable................................................... 137
driving with a trailer............................ 135
Trip computer............................................ 54
Type approved, remote control system... 272
Type designation..................................... 256
Tyres
direction of rotation............................ 160
driving characteristics......................... 158
general................................................ 158
maintenance....................................... 158
pressure...................................... 161, 162
puncture repair................................... 169
specifications...................................... 158
speed ratings...................................... 158
tread wear indicators.......................... 159
tyre pressure monitoring..................... 165
winter tyres......................................... 160
V
Vibration damper..................................... 137
W
Warning lamp
stability and traction control system. . 127
Warning lamps
seatbelt reminder.................................. 17
Warning symbol, AIRBAG system............. 18
Warning triangle....................................... 163
Washer fluid, filling................................... 190
Washers
headlamps............................................ 57
windscreen........................................... 57
Water and dirt-repellent coating................ 68
Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 177
Waxing..................................................... 177
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 280
evastarck
12 Alphabetical Index
12
281
Weights
kerb weight......................................... 259
trailer weight....................................... 135
Wheels
changing............................................. 167
installation........................................... 168
removal............................................... 167
rims..................................................... 160
snow chains........................................ 159
spare wheel........................................ 163
Whiplash injury, WHIPS............................. 27
WHIPS
child seat/booster cushion................... 27
whiplash injury...................................... 27
Windscreen washing.................................. 57
Windscreen wipers.................................... 56
rain sensor............................................ 56
Winter tyres.............................................. 160
Wiper blades............................................ 193
changing............................................. 193
cleaning.............................................. 193
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 281
evastarck
12 Alphabetical Index
12
282
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 282
evastarck
Notes
283
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 283
evastarck
Notes
284
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 284
evastarck
Notes
285
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 285
evastarck
Notes
286
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 286
evastarck
Notes
287
P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 287
evastarck
Related manuals for Volvo S60 Owners Manual 2009
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the S60 Volvo works, you can view and download the Volvo S60 Owners Manual 2009 on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Volvo S60 as well as other Volvo manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Volvo S60. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Volvo S60 Owners Manual 2009 is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Volvo S60 Owners Manual 2009 consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Volvo S60 Owners Manual 2009 free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Volvo S60 Owners Manual 2009, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Volvo S60 Owners Manual 2009 as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.